453464

Pentax K-r Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/353
Pagina verder
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX W Digital Camera. Please read this manual
before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions.
Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the
camera’s capabilities.
Lenses you can use
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J
lenses and lenses that have an s (Auto) position on the aperture ring. To use any other
lens or accessory, see p.56 and p.312.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken with the W that are for anything other than personal enjoyment
cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright
Act. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking
pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items
on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used
outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care
should be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
PENTAX, W and smc PENTAX are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility and SDM are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The DNG logo is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
IrSimple™ and IrSST™ Trademarks are owned by the Infrared Data Association
®
.
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies. However, the TM or ® marks are not used in all cases in this
manual.
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled
digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more
faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not
PRINT Image Matching III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 0 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1
To users of this camera
• Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic
fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the
monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause
camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely high
precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this
manual are different from the actual ones.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a
Macintosh hereafter.
• The camera can use either D-LI109 battery or the optional AA battery holder D-BH109
with four AA batteries. In this manual, both the D-LI109 and D-BH109 are referred to
as the battery hereafter.
Except stated above, the generic term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries
used for this camera and its accessories.
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this
product, we request your special attention regarding items marked with the
following symbols.
Warning
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside the
camera, with the risk of electric shock.
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera,
never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens attached, as
viewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun directly with a telephoto lens
may lead to a loss of eyesight.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use
immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest
PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric
shock.
For Using Your Camera Safely
Warning
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause
serious personal injuries.
Caution
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor
or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.
About the Camera
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 1 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn
yourself.
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may
occur.
• Do not send data via infrared transmission with the infrared port of the camera pointed
at a person’s eyes. Doing so may cause impaired eyesight and other injury.
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperature
burns when holding such portions for long periods.
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not
to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may
cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera
and get medical attention immediately.
Warning
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this
product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter
not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with
an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera
breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger and AC plug cord,
unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can cause
damage to the equipment, fire or electrical shock.
• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated dust may
cause a fire.
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord
is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on
male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is
provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial
type configuration) or the equivalent.
Caution
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so
may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX
Service Center.
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord is
plugged in.
• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause equipment
breakdown.
• Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than the rechargeable
lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may cause
an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.
About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 2 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3
Warning
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.
Caution
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an
explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion
or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the
battery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion
or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Precautions for D-LI109 Battery Usage:
USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.
- DO NOT INCINERATE.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C)
Warning
• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.
Caution
• When using the optional AA battery holder D-BH109, four AA alkaline, AA lithium or
AA Ni-MH batteries can be used. Do not use batteries other than those specified here.
Using other types of batteries may cause the camera to function poorly, or the
batteries may explode or cause a fire.
• AA alkaline and AA lithium batteries cannot be recharged. Do not disassemble the
batteries. Attempting to charge non-rechargeable batteries or disassembling the
batteries could result in explosion or leakage.
• The batteries should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on the
batteries. Inserting the batteries incorrectly may cause an explosion or fire.
• When replacing the batteries, do not combine different brands, types or capacities.
Also, do not combine old batteries with new ones. Doing so may cause the batteries
to explode or cause a fire.
• Do not short the batteries or dispose of the batteries in fire. Do not disassemble the
batteries. The batteries could explode or catch fire.
About the Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery
About the Usage of AA Batteries
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 3 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4
• Do not charge any batteries other than rechargeable Ni-MH batteries. The batteries
could explode or catch fire. AA batteries for use with this camera other than Ni-MH
batteries cannot be charged.
• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Remove the batteries from the camera immediately if they become hot or begin to
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
Warning
• Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.
1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally it may cause serious personal injuries.
2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.
3. To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory Cards
from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of small children.
Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is accidentally swallowed.
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the
package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working
properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when
traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or
transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your
camera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance. Avoid storing
in high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will
over-discharge and shorten the battery’s life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the battery
charger D-BC109. Do not use it with other devices.
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave the
camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.
Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of
the Reach of Small Children
Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Using Your Camera
About the Battery and Charger
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 4 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
5
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion to
protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.
• The temperature range for camera use is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal at
normal temperatures.
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid
crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of
the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove the camera
after temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts. These could
cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause it to break or
malfunction.
• Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or benzine.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use a
spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS
sensor. (This will involve a fee.)
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove the
camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated place.
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain high
performance.
• Refer to “Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card” (p.53) regarding the SD
Memory Card.
• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting an SD
Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. It is the user’s
responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.
Cleaning Your Camera
Storing Your Camera
Other Precautions
Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration,
which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX
website. Refer to p.301 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 5 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6
For Using Your Camera Safely ............................................................ 1
Care to be Taken During Handling ...................................................... 4
Contents............................................................................................... 6
Composition of the Operating Manual ............................................... 13
Before Using Your Camera 15
W Camera Characteristics.....................................................16
Checking the Contents of the Package ......................................18
Names and Functions of Working Parts ....................................19
Capture Mode .................................................................................... 20
Playback Mode .................................................................................. 22
Display Indicators.........................................................................24
Monitor ............................................................................................... 24
Viewfinder .......................................................................................... 32
How to Change Function Settings ..............................................34
Using the Direct Keys ........................................................................ 34
Using the Control Panel ..................................................................... 35
Using the Menus ................................................................................ 37
Getting Started 41
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................42
Inserting the Battery.....................................................................43
Using the Lithium-ion Battery............................................................. 43
Using the AA Batteries....................................................................... 46
Battery Level Indicator ....................................................................... 49
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time (Fully
Charged Battery/New AA Batteries) .................................................. 49
Using the AC Adapter (Optional) ....................................................... 50
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card...................................52
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level .................................................... 54
Attaching a Lens...........................................................................56
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter................................................58
Turning the Camera On and Off ..................................................59
Initial Settings ...............................................................................60
Setting the Display Language ............................................................ 60
Setting the Date and Time ................................................................. 64
Contents
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 6 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
7
Basic Operations 67
Basic Shooting Operation ...........................................................68
Holding the Camera ........................................................................... 68
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings.............................. 69
Using a Zoom Lens ......................................................................74
Using the Built-in Flash ...............................................................75
Setting the Flash Mode ...................................................................... 75
Compensating Flash Output .............................................................. 81
Playing Back Pictures ..................................................................82
Playing Back Images ......................................................................... 82
Deleting a Single Image..................................................................... 84
Shooting Functions 85
How to Operate the Shooting Functions....................................86
Direct Keys Setting Items................................................................... 86
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items.......................................................... 87
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items .................................................. 89
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode...................................91
Picture Modes .................................................................................... 92
H Modes......................................................................................... 93
Exposure Modes ................................................................................ 95
Setting the Exposure....................................................................96
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed ................................................ 96
Setting the Sensitivity......................................................................... 98
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)................................. 100
Changing the Exposure Mode ......................................................... 103
Selecting the Metering Method ........................................................ 114
Adjusting the Exposure .................................................................... 117
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting
(AE Lock) ......................................................................................... 120
Focusing......................................................................................122
Using the Autofocus......................................................................... 122
Setting the AF Mode ........................................................................ 125
AF Fine Adjustment ......................................................................... 128
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)........................................... 129
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock) ...................................................... 132
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus) ................................ 134
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 7 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
8
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before
Shooting (Preview) .....................................................................137
Assigning the Preview Function to the Green Button ...................... 137
Displaying the Optical Preview ........................................................ 139
Displaying the Digital Preview.......................................................... 140
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera
Shake ...........................................................................................141
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function..................... 141
Shooting with Self-timer ................................................................... 145
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional) ........................................ 147
Taking Pictures Continuously...................................................149
Continuous Shooting........................................................................ 149
Interval Shooting .............................................................................. 151
Multi-exposure ................................................................................. 153
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ........................................155
Shooting with Live View ............................................................159
Setting Live View ............................................................................. 160
Taking Still Pictures ......................................................................... 162
Recording Movies.......................................................................165
Changing the Movie Settings ........................................................... 165
Recording Movies ............................................................................ 167
Playing Back Movies........................................................................ 169
Editing Movies.................................................................................. 171
Using the Flash 173
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode........................174
Using the Slow-speed Sync ............................................................. 174
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync ....................................................... 176
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash............178
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash ...............................179
Using an External Flash (Optional)...........................................180
Using P-TTL Auto Mode .................................................................. 181
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode ............................................... 182
Using Flash in Wireless Mode ......................................................... 183
Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.................... 187
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords .............................. 188
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash............................................................ 189
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 8 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
9
Shooting Settings 191
Setting a File Format ..................................................................192
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels .................................................. 192
Setting the JPEG Quality Level........................................................ 193
Setting the File Format..................................................................... 195
Setting the Green Button Function...........................................197
Setting the White Balance .........................................................200
Adjusting the White Balance Manually............................................. 202
Fine-Tuning the White Balance........................................................ 204
Setting the Color Space ................................................................... 205
Correcting Images ......................................................................207
Adjusting Brightness ........................................................................ 207
Lens Correction................................................................................ 211
Setting the Image Finishing Tone .............................................213
Setting Custom Image ..................................................................... 213
Setting Cross Processing................................................................. 216
Playback Functions 219
Playback Functions Operation..................................................220
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items .............................................. 220
Playback Menu Setting Items .......................................................... 221
Setting the Playback Display Method.......................................222
Enlarging Images........................................................................223
Displaying Multiple Images .......................................................224
Multi-image Display Screen ............................................................. 224
Displaying Images by Folder............................................................ 225
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar Display) ................ 226
Comparing Images........................................................................... 228
Joining Multiple Images (Index) ....................................................... 229
Playing Back Images Continuously..........................................232
Setting the Slideshow Display.......................................................... 232
Starting the Slideshow ..................................................................... 233
Rotating Images..........................................................................235
Deleting Multiple Images ...........................................................236
Deleting Selected Images ................................................................ 236
Deleting a Folder.............................................................................. 238
Deleting All Images .......................................................................... 239
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 9 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
10
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ..............................240
Protecting a Single Image................................................................ 240
Protecting All Images ....................................................................... 241
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .................................242
Exchanging Image Data with Other Devices............................244
Sending and Receiving Image Data via Infrared Transmission ....... 244
Playing a Dueling Game using Your Images (Dueling Images)....... 246
Processing Images 249
Changing the Image Size ...........................................................250
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
(Resize)............................................................................................ 250
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) ........................................ 251
Processing Images with Digital Filters.....................................253
Applying the Digital Filter ................................................................. 255
Recreating Filter Effects................................................................... 256
Searching for the Original Image ..................................................... 258
Developing RAW Images ...........................................................259
Developing One RAW Image........................................................... 259
Developing Multiple RAW Images ................................................... 260
Specifying the Parameters............................................................... 262
Changing Additional Settings 265
How to Operate the Set-up Menu ..............................................266
Set-up Menu Setting Items .............................................................. 266
Formatting an SD Memory Card................................................268
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display Language ......269
Setting the Beep .............................................................................. 269
Changing the Date and Time Display .............................................. 270
Setting the World Time .................................................................... 270
Setting the Display Language .......................................................... 273
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display ..........................274
Setting the Text Size........................................................................ 274
Setting the Guide Display Time ....................................................... 274
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed ............................................ 275
Setting the Status Screen Display ................................................... 276
Setting the Display for Instant Review ............................................. 276
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor ........................................... 277
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor.................................................... 278
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 10 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
11
Setting the Folder/File Number .................................................279
Changing the Naming System of the Folder .................................... 279
Creating New Folders ...................................................................... 279
Selecting the File Number Setting ................................................... 280
Selecting the Power Settings ....................................................281
Setting the Auto Power Off Function................................................ 281
Setting the Battery Type .................................................................. 282
Setting the Photographer Information......................................283
Setting the DPOF Settings.........................................................285
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor
(Pixel Mapping) ...........................................................................287
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory)...............288
Connecting to a Computer 291
Manipulating Captured Images on a Computer.......................292
Saving Images on Your Computer............................................293
Setting the USB Connection Mode .................................................. 293
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera and Your Computer .. 294
Using the Provided Software.....................................................296
Installing the Software...................................................................... 296
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4............................. 298
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 11 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
12
Appendix 303
Default Settings ..........................................................................304
Resetting the Menus ..................................................................310
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menus .......................... 310
Resetting the Custom Menu ............................................................ 311
Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations...........312
Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring] ................................................. 314
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor .......................................................315
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Removal) ................................................................................ 315
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Alert)....................................................................................... 316
Removing Dust with a Blower .......................................................... 318
Optional Accessories.................................................................320
Error Messages...........................................................................325
Troubleshooting .........................................................................328
Main Specifications ....................................................................331
Glossary ......................................................................................337
Index ............................................................................................342
WARRANTY POLICY ..................................................................348
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 12 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
13
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
Composition of the Operating Manual
1 Before Using Your Camera
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of
various parts.
2 Getting Started
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to
read this chapter and follow the instructions.
3 Basic Operations
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.
4 Shooting Functions
Explains the shooting-related functions.
5 Using the Flash
Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.
6 Shooting Settings
Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file format.
7 Playback Functions
Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting images.
8 Processing Images
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, applying digital filters and
developing images taken in RAW format.
9 Changing Additional Settings
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor
display settings and the image folder naming convention.
10 Connecting to a Computer
Explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation
instructions and a general overview of the provided software.
11 Appendix
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various
resources.
1
5
4
3
2
6
10
9
8
7
11
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 13 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
14
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.
1
Indicates reference page number explaining a related operation.
Indicates useful information.
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 14 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1 Before Using Your
Camera
Check the package contents and the names and functions
of working parts before use.
W Camera Characteristics ............................16
Checking the Contents of the Package ..............18
Names and Functions of Working Parts ............19
Display Indicators ................................................24
How to Change Function Settings ......................34
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 15 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
16
Before Using Your Camera
1
W Camera Characteristics
• Features a 23.6×15.8 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 12.4 million
effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with
minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.
• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera,
with a magnification of approximately 0.85 and field of view of
approximately 96%, for easier image composition and manual focusing.
Also features a superimpose function in which the active AF point(s) on
the viewfinder illuminate red.
• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, a
wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions for
high-precision viewing performance.
• In addition to the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109, the
commercially available AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable
batteries or AA alkaline batteries can also be used with the optional AA
battery holder D-BH109.
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject in
real-time on the monitor.
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the lens properties. The
camera can also output a composite video signal so that you can view
recorded images and movies on a monitor such as a TV screen.
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the
camera. The large text size, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use
menus make the camera easier to operate.
• The CMOS sensor features a special SP coating to prevent dust sticking
to the sensor. The Dust Removal function also shakes the CMOS
sensor for removing collected dust.
• Features Digital Filters to internally process the image in the camera.
You can use digital filters such as Color or Soft while taking pictures or
to process images after taking them.
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while
previewing the end result of the edited image, enabling a wider range of
expression.
• Records images in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in
both formats simultaneously. Pictures taken in RAW format can be
easily processed internally by the camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 16 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
17
• Features Sensitivity Priority mode K that automatically adjusts
aperture and shutter speed according to the set sensitivity.
• Supports infrared transmission (IrSimple/IrSS) which allows you to send
and receive image data to and from cell phones and printers.
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the W and 35 mm SLR
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format sizes for 35 mm film
and CMOS sensor are different.
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor
35 mm film: 36×24 mm
W CMOS sensor: 23.6×15.8 mm
The focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera is about 1.5 times longer
than that of the W. To shoot images with an angle of view framing the same
area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm
camera
150÷1.5=100
Use a 100 mm lens with the W.
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the W by 1.5 to
determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the W
300×1.5=450
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.
Shake Reduction (SR)
Shake Reduction (SR) on the W features a PENTAX original
system which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high
speeds, compensating for camera shake.
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken,
such as when changing the composition of a picture. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
Additionally Saving as a RAW Image
When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data
still remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save the
image in RAW format by pressing the mc button during playback.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the
corresponding RAW image listed is saved.
• Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing
• Digital Filter RAW image without filter effect
• HDR Capture RAW image with standard exposure
• Multi-exposure RAW image with Multi-exposure
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 17 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
18
Before Using Your Camera
1
Checking the Contents of the
Package
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.
Check that all accessories are included.
Hot shoe cover FK
(Installed on camera)
Eyecup F
Q
(Installed on camera)
Body mount cover
(Installed on camera)
USB cable
I-USB7
Strap
O-ST53
Rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI109
Battery charger
D-BC109
AC plug cord
Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW110
Operating Manual
(this manual)
Refer to p.320 for information on optional accessories.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 18 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
19
Before Using Your Camera
1
Names and Functions of Working
Parts
* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Eyecup FQ removed.
Tripod socket
Battery cover
Battery cover
unlock lever
Self-timer lamp/
Remote control receiver
AF coupler
Mirror
Lens unlock button
Lens information
contacts
Card cover
Strap lug
Hot shoe
Lens mount index
(red dot)
Built-in flash
PC/AV terminal
Diopter
adjustment lever
Terminal cover
Viewfinder
Card access lamp
Monitor
AF assist light
Speaker
Microphone
Image plane indicator
Infrared port
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 19 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
20
Before Using Your Camera
1
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.
Capture Mode
The factory default settings are explained here. Depending on the button, these
settings can be changed.
3
4
1
7
0
d
6
9
8
e
5
2
a
b
c
f
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 20 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
21
1 | (Green) button
You can assign a function to
this button. (p.197)
2 Shutter release button
Press to capture images.
(p.72)
3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
and off. (p.59)
4 Lens unlock button
Press to detach a lens. (p.57)
5 mc button
Sets the EV compensation
and aperture values. (p.104,
p.110, p.117)
6 Mode dial
Changes Capture mode. (p.91)
7 Focus mode lever
Switches between autofocus
mode (p.122) and manual
focus mode (p.134).
8 K/i button
Press to pop up the built-in
flash. (p.75)
9 E-dial
Sets the shutter speed,
aperture, sensitivity and EV
compensation values.
0 =/L button
You can select the function of
this button either to focus on
the target or to lock the
exposure value. (p.112, p.120,
p.123)
a Q button
Switches to Playback mode.
(p.82)
b U button
Displays a Live View image.
(p.159)
c M button
Displays the status screen
(p.25)
Switches to the control panel
when the status screen is
shown. (p.26)
d 4 button
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed,
press this button to confirm
the selected item.
When the focusing area is set
to S (Select), press this
button to enable or disable
changing the AF point. (p.129)
e Four-way controller
(2345)
Displays the Drive Mode/
Flash Mode/White Balance/
Sensitivity setup menu. (p.86)
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed, use
this to move the cursor or
change items.
Changes the AF point when it
can be changed.
f 3 button
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu (p.87). Next, press the
four-way controller (5) to
display other menus.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 21 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
22
Before Using Your Camera
1
Functions of buttons, dial and lever used during playback are noted.
Playback Mode
3
4
2
9
6
0
7
8
a
5
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 22 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
23
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the four-
way controller are referred to in the following way.
1 | (Green) button
Press to change the settings,
such as resetting the values.
(p.197)
2 Shutter release button
Press halfway to switch to
Capture mode.
3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
and off. (p.59)
4 mc button
When the file format of the last
captured image is JPEG, and
its data still remains in the
buffer memory, press this
button to additionally save the
image in RAW format. (p.83)
5 K/i button
Press to delete images. (p.84)
6 E-dial
Use this to enlarge an image
(p.223) or display multiple
images at the same time
(p.224).
7 Q button
Switches to Capture mode.
8 M button
Displays shooting information
on the monitor. (p.27)
9 4 button
Confirms the setting you
selected in the menu or
playback screen.
0 Four-way controller
(2345)
Use this to move the cursor or
change items in the menu or
playback screen.
Press the four-way controller
(3) to display the playback
mode palette. (p.220)
a 3 button
Displays the [Q Playback 1]
menu (p.221). Next, press the
four-way controller (5) to
display other menus.
References to Button Names
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 23 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
24
Before Using Your Camera
1
Display Indicators
The various information appears on
the monitor depending on the status
of the camera.
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when the
camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.
Monitor
The brightness and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.277, p.278)
At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial
1 Capture mode (p.91) 3 Current date and time (p.64)
2 World Time (p.270)
(only when set to Destination)
To not show guides, set [Guide Display] to [Off] in the [R Set-up 1] menu.
(p.274)
Monitor
09/09/2010 10:30AM
P
Program
Automatic Exposure
P
1
23
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 24 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
25
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current
shooting function settings. You can change the type of the screen
displayed by pressing the M button.
Status screen
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may
differ.)
Capture Mode
1 Capture Mode (p.91) 13 EV Compensation (p.117)/
Exposure Bracketing (p.118)
2 AE Lock (p.120)
3 Interval Shooting (p.149)/Multi-
exposure (p.153)/Digital Filter
(p.155)/HDR Capture (p.209)
/Cross Processing (p.216)
14 EV bar
15
Flash Exposure Compensation (p.81)
16 White Balance fine-tuning (p.204)
17 Drive Mode (p.86)
4 Custom Image (p.213)/
Cross Processing (p.216)
18 White Balance (p.200)
19 Select AF point (p.129)
5 Focus Mode (p.122) 20 Sensitivity (p.98)
6 AE Metering (p.114) 21 Flash Mode (p.75)
7 Battery level (p.49) 22 File Format (p.195)
8 E-dial guide 23 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.192)
9 Shutter speed 24 JPEG Quality (p.193)
10 Aperture value 25 Shake Reduction (p.141)
11 ISO AUTO 26 Remaining image storage
capacity/| button guide
12 Sensitivity (p.98)
P
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
125 5.6F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
200
JPEG
12M
[
37
]
Custom Image
Bright
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
OFF
OFF
Status screen
M
Control panel Blank
MM
12
910
88
11 12
14
8
15 16
22 23 24 25 26
17
18 19 20
21
13
34 5 67
P
SHIFT
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
2000 2.8
±1.0
G1A1
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12
M
[
37
]
1600
JPEG
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 25 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
26
Before Using Your Camera
1
Control panel
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change
settings.
1 Function name 11 Highlight Correction (p.207)
2 Setting 12 Shadow Correction (p.208)
3 Custom Image (p.213) 13 File Format (p.195)
4 Cross Processing (p.216) 14 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.192)
5 Digital Filter (p.155) 15 JPEG Quality (p.193)
6 HDR Capture (p.209) 16 Distortion Correction (p.211)
7 Shake Reduction (p.141) 17 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Correction (p.211)
8 AE Metering (p.114)
9 AF Mode (p.125) 18 Current date and time
10 Select AF point (p.129) 19 Remaining image storage capacity
• Settings that cannot be changed due to the current camera setup cannot be
selected.
• On the status screen, the setting currently being changed or guide display for
the buttons that can be operated are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen]
in the [R Set-up 1] menu is set to [Display Color 1]).
•
The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds.
Press the
M
button to display it again.
•
If no operations are made within 30 seconds in the control panel, the status
screen will reappear.
•
If [Shooting Info Display] is set to
O
(On) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [
A
Rec.
Mode 4] menu and the blank screen is selected, the next time the camera is
turned on the blank screen is displayed first.
•
[9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed on
the status screen and in the control panel. Even if the number of recordable
images is 10,000 or more, [9999] is displayed.
1
2
18 19
43 567
98101112
1413 15 16 17
12
M
[
37
]
Custom Image
Bright
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 26 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
27
The camera switches the types of information display when you press the
M button during playback.
Playback Mode
Standard Captured image, file format and guides are displayed.
Histogram display
Captured image and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are
displayed. Not available during movie playback. (p.30)
Detailed information
display
Detailed information on how and when the image was
taken is displayed. (p.28)
No info. display Only captured image is displayed.
The type of information display that is shown first during playback is the same
as that of the last playback in the previous session. If [Playback Info Display] is
set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the [Standard]
screen is always displayed first when the camera is turned on.
2000 F5.6
JPEG
1/
100-0001
100-0001
RAW
RAW
200
ISO
2000 F5.6
JPEG
1/
100-0001
100-0001
RAW
RAW
200
ISO
P
09/09/2010
10:00AM
100-0001
1/
2000
AF.A
12
M
G2
200
ISO
24
m
m
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
JPEG
AdobeRGB
A1
F5.6 +1.5 -0.5
DR
DR
200
200
Standard
M
M
M
M
No info. display Detailed information display
Histogram display
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 27 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
28
Before Using Your Camera
1
Detailed information display
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.
P
09/09/2010
10:00AM
09/09/2010
10:00AM
100-0001
1/
2000
AF.A
12
M
G2
200
ISO
24
mm
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
JPEG
AdobeRGB
A1
F2.8
F2.8
+1.5 -0.5
100-0001
100-0001
DR
DR
200
200
G2MONO
Movie
10
min
10
sec
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
A1
OFF
OFF
3
2
2
2
3
45
4
34
35 36
37 13 38
5
6
30
7
8
9
10 11
12 13 14 15 18
19
19
1716
20
23
23
24
24
25 26 27 28 29
2725 26 29
31
30
31
3332
32
21
22
1
45
39
40
41
39
1
Page 1
Still Picture
Movie
Still Picture/Movie
Page 2
2
3
2
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 28 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
29
* For images taken with Live View, the autofocus method is displayed for indicator
9.
* Indicators 7 and 21 appear only for images taken with the flash.
* Indicators 13, 14, 15, 16, and 24 appear only for images taken with the
corresponding functions enabled.
* Indicators 26 and 27 do not appear for RAW images.
1 Rotation information (p.235) 20 EV Compensation (p.117)
2 Captured image 21 Flash Exposure Compensation
(p.81)
3 Capture Mode (p.91)
4 Protect (p.240) 22 Sensitivity (p.98)
5 Folder number-File number
(p.279)
23 White Balance (p.200)
24 White Balance fine-tuning (p.204)
6 Drive Mode (p.86) 25 File Format (p.195)
7 Flash Mode (p.75) 26 Recorded Pixels (p.165, p.192)
8 Lens focal length 27 Quality Level (p.165, p.193)
9 AF point (p.129)/
Autofocus Method (p.160)
28 Color Space (p.205)
29 Shake Reduction (p.141, p.166)
10 Focus Mode (p.122) 30 Image Tone (p.213)
11 AE Metering (p.114) 31 Custom Image parameters (p.213)
12 Shutter speed 32 Shooting date and time
13 Digital Filter (p.155) 33 DPOF Setting (p.285)
14 HDR Capture (p.209)/
Multi-exposure (p.153)/
Cross Processing (p.216)
34 Recording time
35 Sound setting (p.166)
36 Sound type (p.165)
15 Highlight Correction (p.207) 37 Drive Mode (Remote Control)
16 Shadow Correction (p.208) 38 Cross Processing (p.216)
17 Distortion Correction (p.211) 39 Information tampering warning
18 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Adjustment (p.211)
40 Photographer (p.283)
41 Copyright Holder (p.283)
19 Aperture value
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 29 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
30
Before Using Your Camera
1
Histogram Display
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still
pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness
and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Press
the four-way controller (23) to switch between “Brightness histogram”
and “RGB histogram”.
* Indicator 2 appears only for protected images.
* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image is
JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory. (p.83)
1 Histogram (Brightness) 7 Shutter speed
2 Protect 8 Aperture value
3 Folder number-File number 9 Sensitivity
4 Additionally saving in RAW format 10 DPOF Setting
5 Switch RGB histogram/ Brightness
histogram
11 Histogram (R)
12 Histogram (G)
6 File Format 13 Histogram (B)
If [Bright/Dark Area] (p.222) of the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to O (On),
areas affected by bright or dark portions blink (except when in RGB histogram
display and Detailed information display).
2000 F5.6 200
100-0001
100-0001
1/
2000 F5.6
100-0001
100-0001
1/
ISO
200
ISO
RAW
RAW
97 8 10 6 7 8 9 106
5
11
4
12
13
5
1
1 3232
Brightness histogram RGB histogram
23
23
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 30 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
31
A histogram shows the brightness
distribution of an image. The horizontal
axis represents brightness (dark at the
left and bright at the right) and the vertical
axis represents the number of pixels.
The shape and the distribution of the
histogram before and after shooting
tells you whether the exposure level
and contrast are correct or not, and lets
you decide if you need to adjust the
exposure and take a picture again.
1 Adjusting the Exposure (p.117)
1 Adjusting Brightness (p.207)
Understanding Brightness
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly bright or dark
areas, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is
on the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with
no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off
(bright portions with no detail).
Bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow on the monitor
when [Bright/Dark Area] is O (On).
1 Playing Back Images (p.82)
1 Setting the Playback Display Method (p.222)
1 Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.276)
Understanding Color Balance
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB histogram.
The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have White Balance
adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that color is too intense.
1 Setting the White Balance (p.200)
Using the Histogram
Number of pixels→
←Brightness→(Dark) (Bright)
Dark portions Bright portions
Dark image Image with few bright
or dark areas
Bright image
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 31 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
32
Before Using Your Camera
1
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,
buttons and e-dial that can be operated at that time.
Example)
The following information appears in the viewfinder.
Guide Indicators
2 Four-way controller (2) 3 button
3 Four-way controller (3) M button
4 Four-way controller (4) =/L button
5 Four-way controller (5) | Green button
4 button mmc button
S E-dial K/i button
Shutter release button
Viewfinder
1 AF frame (p.58)
2 Spot metering frame (p.115)
3 AF point (p.129)
4 Flash status (p.75)
Lit: when flash is available.
Blinks: when flash is recommended but not set.
4 5
12
7910116 8
1
2
1
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 32 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
33
5 Picture mode icon (p.92)
The icon for Picture mode in use appears.
U (Normal mode of I), = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),
\ (Moving Object), . (Night Scene Portrait)
6 Shake Reduction (p.141)
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
7 Shutter speed
Shutter speed when capturing or adjusting.
Underlined when the shutter speed can be adjusted with the e-dial.
A countdown of processing time is displayed when the Noise Reduction
function is activated. (p.100)
8 Aperture value
Aperture value when capturing or adjusting.
Underlined when the aperture value can be adjusted with the e-dial.
[nr] blinks when the Noise Reduction function is activated. (p.100)
9 Focus indicator (p.70)
Lit: when the subject is focused.
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.
10 Number of recordable images/EV compensation value
Displays the number of recordable images with current quality level and
recorded pixels.
The difference from the proper exposure value appears when the mode dial
is set to a. (p.111)
m: EV Compensation (p.117)
Underlined when the EV compensation value can be adjusted with the
e-dial while the mc button is pressed.
o: Sensitivity
Underlined when the sensitivity can be adjusted with the e-dial.
11 Focus mode (p.122)
Appears when set to \.
12 AE Lock (p.120)
Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.
• The AF point(s) in use for autofocus appear in red (Superimpose AF Area)
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway. (p.129)
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed
in the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,
[9999] is displayed.
• When [AF/AE-L Button] is set to [Cancel AF] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,
\ is displayed in the viewfinder while the =/L button is pressed.
(p.123)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 33 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
34
Before Using Your Camera
1
How to Change Function Settings
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel or
menus.
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.
In Capture mode, you can set Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance
and Sensitivity by pressing the four-way controller (2345). (p.86)
Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.
1
Press the four-way controller (3)
in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a flash mode.
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Using the Direct Keys
OK
MENU
0.0
Flash Mode
Cancel OK
Auto Flash Discharge
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 34 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
35
While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.
Below, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.
1
Check the status screen and then
press the M button.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status
screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select an item you
want to change the setting for.
You cannot select items that cannot be
changed.
When direct key operation is enabled, the guide indicators for the direct keys
are displayed in the status screen. Direct key operation is not available when
the AF point is being changed while the focusing area is set to S (Select). In
such cases, press and hold the 4 button. (p.130)
Using the Control Panel
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
20 5.6
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
800
AUTO
PICT
12M
[
37
]
Custom Image
Bright
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 35 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
36
Before Using Your Camera
1
3
Press the 4 button.
The setup screen of the selected item
appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(45) or e-dial to select a setting
value.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.
• You can also change the setting by turning the e-dial after selecting the item
you want to change in Step 2. Detailed settings such as parameters can be
changed after pressing the 4 button.
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View
(p.159) is displayed. Make or change necessary settings in the [A Rec.
Mode] menu in advance.
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
JPEG Quality
OFF
OFF
MENU
128
OK
OK
JPEG Quality
Cancel
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 36 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
37
This section explains how to use the menus: [A Rec. Mode],
[Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting] menus.
Below, how to set [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
is explained as an example.
1
Press the 3 button in
Capture mode.
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on
the monitor.
If the 3 button is pressed in
Playback mode, the [Q Playback 1]
menu appears. When the mode dial is set
to H (Scene), the [H Scene] menu
appears instead.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Each time the four-way controller (5) is
pressed, the menu will change in the
following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],
[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],
[Q Playback 1] ··· [A Rec. Mode 1].
You can also use the e-dial to switch the
menus.
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose an item.
Using the Menus
JPEG
Exit
MENU
1 234
File Format
Custom Image
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
12M
AF Mode AF.A
AE Metering
Select AF Point
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Exit
MENU
1 2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
AUTO
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 37 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
38
Before Using Your Camera
1
4
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Available settings are displayed.
The frame moves to the pop-up menu if
there is one. When there is a submenu, it
is displayed.
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a setting.
6
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Press the 3 button if a submenu is
displayed.
Next, set other items.
7
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.
Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your
settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by
removing the battery while the camera is on).
MENU
1 2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ISO
NR
AUTO
NR
AUTO
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Exit
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 2
3
4
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
ISO
NR
AUTO
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
NR
OFF
NR
ON
NR
AUTO
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 38 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Before Using Your Camera
1
39
• You can select whether to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or
to always display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu first. (p.275)
• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.
•[A Rec. Mode] menu 1 p.87
•[Q Playback] menu 1 p.221
•[R Set-up] menu 1 p.266
•[A Custom Setting] menu 1 p.89
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 39 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Memo
40
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 40 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
2 Getting Started
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the
camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the
instructions.
Attaching the Strap ..............................................42
Inserting the Battery ............................................43
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card ..........52
Attaching a Lens ..................................................56
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter .......................58
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................59
Initial Settings .......................................................60
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 41 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
42
Getting Started
2
Attaching the Strap
1
Pass the end of the strap through
the strap lug, then secure it on
the inside of the clasp.
2
Attach the other end of the strap
in the same manner as described
above.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 42 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
43
Getting Started
2
Inserting the Battery
Insert the lithium-ion battery or AA batteries into the camera.
Use the exclusive battery D-LI109.
When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not been
used in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge the
battery.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
2
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
Using the Lithium-ion Battery
Charging the Battery
Indicator lamp
Battery charger
AC plug cord
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 43 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
44
Getting Started
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the
exclusive battery up and insert it
into the battery charger.
First, insert the battery at an angle, as
shown in the illustration, and then push
down on the battery until it clicks.
The indicator lamp is lit during charging
and turns off when the battery is fully
charged.
4
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from
the battery charger.
•
Do not use the provided Battery Charger D-BC109 to charge batteries other
than rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Charging other batteries may
cause damage or heating.
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but the
indicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Use a new battery in the camera.
• The maximum charging time is approximately 240 minutes (it depends on
temperature and remaining battery power). Charge in a location where the
temperature is between 0°C and 40°C.
• If battery usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has
reached the end of its life. Use a new battery in the camera.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 44 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
45
Getting Started
2
1
Slide the battery cover unlock
lever in the direction of the arrow
(1) to open the battery cover
(2).
2
Face the 2 mark on the battery
towards outside of the camera,
push the battery lock lever in the
direction of the arrow (3) and
insert the battery.
To remove the battery, push the battery
lock lever in the direction of the arrow (3)
with your finger. Remove the battery
when it pops out slightly.
Inserting/Removing the Battery
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The
battery may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install a new battery
after a long time has passed since the battery was removed, follow the
procedure for “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may not be
removed. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth before
inserting.
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is
used continuously for a long period of time.
1
2
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 45 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
46
Getting Started
2
3
Close the battery cover.
When using AA batteries, be sure to use the optional AA battery holder
D-BH109. (p.320)
Use four AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries, or AA
alkaline batteries.
Using the AA Batteries
Available Batteries Characteristics
AA lithium batteries Recommended when using the camera in cold climates.
AA Ni-MH
rechargeable
batteries
These are rechargeable and are economical.
A commercially available battery charger that is
compatible with the batteries is required.
AA alkaline batteries
These are easily obtainable when the batteries you are
using run out but they may not support all the camera
functions under certain conditions. We do not recommend
using them except in emergencies or when checking the
camera functionality.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 46 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
47
Getting Started
2
1
Insert the AA batteries according
to the +/– indicators in the
battery holder.
2
Slide the battery cover unlock
lever in the direction of the arrow
(1) to open the battery cover
(2).
• Do not use the Ni-Mn batteries as the batteries’ voltage characteristics may
cause a malfunction.
• AA lithium batteries and AA alkaline batteries that can be used in this camera
are not rechargeable.
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the batteries while the power is on.
• Remove the batteries when you do not plan to use the camera for a long time.
If you leave them in the camera for a long time, they may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install new batteries
after a long time has passed since the batteries were removed, follow the
procedure for “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
• Insert the batteries correctly. Batteries inserted incorrectly may cause a
camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the batteries before inserting.
• Replace all the batteries at the same time and do not mix battery types,
brands or old batteries with new ones. Otherwise, malfunctions, such as the
battery level not being displayed properly, may occur.
1
2
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 47 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
48
Getting Started
2
3
Insert the battery holder into the
battery chamber.
Push the battery lock lever in the
direction of the arrow (3) and insert the
battery holder until it locks.
To remove the battery holder, push the
battery lock lever in the direction of the
arrow (3) with your finger. Remove the
battery holder when it pops out slightly.
4
Close the battery cover.
• To use the AA batteries, set the AA battery type in [AA Battery Type] of the
[R Set-up 3] menu before use. (p.282)
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when using
the camera for a prolonged period. (p.50)
• Check the orientation of the batteries if the camera does not operate
properly.
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 48 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
49
Getting Started
2
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the
w displayed on
the status screen.
The image storage capacity (normal recording and flash use 50%) is based on
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is
based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may
occur in actual use depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.
Battery Level Indicator
Status Screen Battery Level
w (Green) Battery is full.
x (Green) Battery is close to full. (D-LI109 only)
f (Orange) Battery is running low. (D-BH109 only)
y (Yellow) Battery is running low. (D-LI109 only)
z (Red) Battery is almost empty.
[Battery depleted] The camera turns off after displaying the message.
f, y or z (Red) may appear even when the battery level is sufficient
if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing continuous
shooting for a long period of time. In this situation, turn the camera off and on
again. If w (Green) appears, you can use the camera.
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback
Time (Fully Charged Battery/New AA Batteries)
Battery
Temperature
Normal
Recording
Flash Photography
Playback
Time
50% Use 100% Use
D-LI109
23°C 560 images 470 images 400 images
300 minutes
0°C 420 images 340 images 280 images
240 minutes
AA lithium
batteries
23°C
1600
images
1000
images
890 images
620
minutes
AA Ni-MH
rechargeable
batteries
(1900mAh)
23°C 610 images 400 images 300 images
330
minutes
AA alkaline
batteries
23°C 200 images 120 images 90 images
270
minutes
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 49 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
50
Getting Started
2
We recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when
using the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a
computer or AV device.
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
2
Open the battery cover.
Refer to Step 1 on p.45.
Remove the battery if it is inserted into
the camera.
3
Insert the DC coupler into the
battery chamber.
Push the battery lock lever in the
direction of the arrow (1) and insert the
DC coupler until it locks.
To remove the DC coupler, push the
battery lock lever in the direction of the
arrow (1) with your finger. Remove the
DC coupler when it pops out slightly.
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries at hand and
keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal
when returned to room temperature.
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold
climates, or taking a lot of pictures.
Using the AC Adapter (Optional)
1
2
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 50 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
51
Getting Started
2
4
Close the battery cover.
The DC coupler’s connection cable is
pulled out from the battery cover.
5
Connect the DC terminals on the AC adapter and the DC
coupler with the 2 marks aligned.
6
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
7
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the
AC adapter.
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card
or data may be corrupted if disconnected while the card is being accessed.
• The connection cable will protrude from the battery cover while the AC
adapter is in use. Be careful as you will not be able to set the camera upright
on a table, etc.
Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit K-AC109 when using the AC
adapter.
5
6
7
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 51 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
52
Getting Started
2
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory
Card
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card
(commercially available). Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards
hereafter. Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing
the SD Memory Card.
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.
2
Slide the card cover in the
direction of the arrow and then
lift it to open (1→2).
3
Insert the card all the way with
the SD Memory Card label facing
toward the monitor.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.
• If the card cover is opened while the power is on, the camera will turn off. Do
not open the cover while the camera is in use.
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting an
SD Memory Card” (p.268) for details on formatting.
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If a write speed
cannot keep up with a recording speed, the writing may stop during
recording.
2
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 52 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
53
Getting Started
2
Push the SD Memory Card in once to
remove.
4
Close the card cover (3) and
then slide it in the direction of the
arrow (4).
Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a
write-protect switch. Setting the switch to
LOCK prevents new data from being
recorded on the card, the stored data from
being deleted, and the card from being
formatted by the camera or computer.
• The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing the card immediately after
using the camera.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card is
being accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away
from water and store away from high temperatures.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be
damaged and become unusable.
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.
We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted if
(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being
accessed.
4
3
Write-protect
switch
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 53 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
54
Getting Started
2
Choose the number of recorded pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG data
compression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use the
pictures you have taken.
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more stars (E) are clearer when
printed. However, the number of pictures that can be taken (the number of
pictures that can be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with
larger file sizes.
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other
factors so you do not need to select more than the required number of
pixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) is
adequate. Set the appropriate recorded pixels and quality level depending
on how the picture will be used.
1 Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.192)
1 Setting the JPEG Quality Level (p.193)
• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may
become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on
a computer.
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or
electrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be
exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with other
cameras.
1 Formatting an SD Memory Card (p.268)
• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
When the File Format is JPEG
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 54 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
55
Getting Started
2
JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image
Storage Capacity
(When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card)
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting
conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.
With the W, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the high
quality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select
PENTAX’s original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 2 GB SD Memory Card, you can
record up to 98 images in both PEF and DNG formats.
1 Setting the File Format (p.195)
JPEG Quality
JPEG Rec. Pixels
C
Best
D
Better
E
Good
E (4288×2848) 281 495 975
J (3936×2624) 332 585 1138
P (3072×2048) 543 945 1807
i
(1728×1152) 1617 2793 5121
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders containing 500 images each. However, in Exposure
Bracketing, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is
completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.
When the File Format is RAW
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 55 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
56
Getting Started
2
Attaching a Lens
Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.
When you use one of the following lenses with the W, all the camera’s
capture modes will be available.
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses
(b) Lenses with an s (Auto) position, when used in the s position
1
Check that the camera is turned off.
2
Remove the body mount cover
(1) and lens mount cover (2).
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens
mount side facing upward to protect the
lens mount from damage.
3
Align the Lens mount index (red
dots: 3) on the camera and the
lens, and secure by turning the
lens clockwise until it clicks.
After attaching, turn the lens
counterclockwise to check that the lens is
locked in place.
Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent
unexpected lens movement.
• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s, some
functions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]”
(p.314).
• With factory default settings, the camera will not work with lenses other than
those listed above and accessories. Set [22. Using Aperture Ring] to
[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to use them. (p.314)
3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 56 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
57
Getting Started
2
4
Remove the front lens cap by
pushing the indicated portions
inward.
To detach the lens, hold down the lens
unlock button (4) and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and
an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.
The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust when
shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.
4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 57 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
58
Getting Started
2
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter
adjustment lever sideways.
You can adjust the diopter from approximately –2.5 to +1.5 m
–1
.
1
Look through the viewfinder and
slide the diopter adjustment
lever left or right.
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the
viewfinder is focused.
Point the camera at a white wall or other
bright and consistent surface.
• The Eyecup FQ is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves
the factory. Diopter can be adjusted with the Eyecup F
Q attached. However,
adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.
• To remove the Eyecup F
Q, pull it out in the
direction of the arrow.
To attach the Eyecup F
Q, align it with the
groove on the viewfinder eyepiece and
push it into the position.
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image
clearly even if you use the diopter
adjustment lever, use the optional diopter
correction lens adapter M. However, the
Eyecup F
Q must be removed to use this
adapter. (p.323)
AF frame
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 58 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
59
Getting Started
2
Turning the Camera On and Off
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].
The camera will turn on.
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]
to turn off the camera.
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera, turn it on again or
perform any of the following.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
-Press the Q button, 3 button, or M button.
• By default, the camera is set to turn off automatically after 1 minute of
inactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]
menu. (p.281)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 59 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
60
Getting Started
2
Initial Settings
The first time the camera is turned on after
purchasing, the [
Language/u] screen
appears on the monitor. Follow the
procedure below to set the language
displayed on the monitor and the current
date and time. Once these settings are
made, you will not need to set them again
next time you turn on your camera.
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set
the date and time by following the procedure
in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
1
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select the desired
language.
Setting the Display Language
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
MENU
/
00 00
:
///
24h
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel
//20100101
mm
dd yy
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 60 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
61
Getting Started
2
2
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the
selected language.
Press the four-way controller (3) twice
and proceed to Step 10 on p.62 if
W (Hometown) does not have to be
changed.
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to W.
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [W Hometown] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a city.
6
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.
9
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [Text Size].
Initial Setting
New York
Text Size
Settings complete
Cancel
MENU
Standard
English
Hometown
DST
New York
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 61 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
62
Getting Started
2
10
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Standard] or
[Large].
Selecting [Large] increases the text size
of the selected menu items.
11
Press the 4 button.
12
Press the four-way controller (3)
to select [Settings complete].
13
Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set
to [Standard].
Initial Setting
New York
Text Size
Settings complete
English
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
Standard
Large
MENU
Initial Setting
New York
Text Size
Settings complete
Cancel
Standard
English
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 62 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
63
Getting Started
2
When the Wrong Language is Set
If you mistakenly select the wrong language in the [Language/u]
screen and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can perform
the following operation to set the language back.
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and the
camera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operation from
Step 2 to set the language back.
1
Press the
3
button once to
display the guides on the monitor.
The screen shown on the right is an
example of the guides displayed. The
displayed screen will vary depending on
the selected language.
The guides appear on the monitor for 3
seconds.
2
Press the 3 button once.
[A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
H is displayed when the mode dial is set to H.
3
Press the four-way controller (5) five times.
[R 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
Press the four-way controller (5) six times when the mode dial is set to
H.
4
Press the four-way controller (
3
) to select [Language/
u
].
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Language/u] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the
desired language and press the 4 button.
The [R Set-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]
and the current date and time as necessary.
• To change the hometown: “Setting the World Time” (p.270)
• To change the date and time: “Changing the Date and Time Display”
(p.270)
• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting]
screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again next time the
camera is turned on.
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselect
a language using the four-way controller (5) in the [Language/u] screen.
2010/01/01 00:00
P
ࡊࡠࠣ࡜ࡓ⥄േ㔺಴
P
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 63 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
64
Getting Started
2
Set the current date and time and the display style.
1
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to choose the date format.
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/
mm/dd].
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [24h].
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select 24h (24-hour
display) or 12h (12-hour display).
5
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
6
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Date].
Setting the Date and Time
MENU
/
00 00
:
/
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel OK
OK
//20100101
24h
//
mm
dd yy
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
/
// 2010
00 00
:
0101
/
mm
dd yy
24h
//
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 64 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
65
Getting Started
2
7
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the month.
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the month.
Set the day and year in the same manner.
Next, set the time.
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the camera
switches between am and pm depending
on the time.
9
Press the four-way controller (3)
to select [Settings complete].
10
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.
If you set the date and time from the menu, the screen will return to the
[R Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.
Pressing the 3 button while setting the date and time cancels the settings
made up to that point and switches the camera to Capture mode. After initial
settings are complete, if the camera power is turned off before the date and
time settings are complete, the [Date Adjustment] screen will appear first next
time you turn the camera on. In this case, you can also set the date and time
from the menu later. (p.270)
• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the seconds value is set to 0. To
set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV,
radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.
• You can change the language and date and time settings from the menu.
(p.270, p.273)
MENU
/
00 00
:
/
OK
Date Format
Date Adjustment
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel
OK
24h
mm
dd yy
//20100101
MENU
00 00
:
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
OK
OK
Cancel
24h
//
//20100909
mm
dd yy
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 65 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Memo
66
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 66 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
3 Basic Operations
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by
setting mode dial to I (Auto Picture) to ensure
successful capturing.
For information about advanced functions and settings for
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.
Basic Shooting Operation ...................................68
Using a Zoom Lens ..............................................74
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................75
Playing Back Pictures ..........................................82
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 67 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
68
Basic Operations
3
Basic Shooting Operation
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close
to your body.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.
Holding the Camera
• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object
such as a table, tree, or wall.
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the slowest
possible shutter speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length
×1.5). For example, it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/
150 of a second for 100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function
(p.141) when using a slower shutter speed.
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight of
the camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.
(p.142)
Horizontal position Vertical position
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 68 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
69
Basic Operations
3
The W features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive
modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how
to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.
1
Set the mode dial to I.
The camera will select the optimal
capture mode for the subject.
1 Selecting the Appropriate Capture
Mode (p.91)
2
Set the focus mode lever to =.
The focus mode changes to =
(Autofocus) mode.
When the shutter release button is
pressed halfway in =, the camera
focuses automatically. (p.122)
3
Look through the viewfinder to
view the subject.
A zoom lens can be used to change the
size of the subject in the viewfinder.
(p.74)
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings
MF
AF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 69 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
70
Basic Operations
3
4
Position the subject inside the
AF frame and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The
focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when the subject comes into
focus.
When set to I (Auto Picture) mode,
the optimal capture mode is automatically
selected from U (Standard),
= (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),
\ (Moving Object) or . (Night Scene
Portrait).
The built-in flash pops up automatically
when necessary.
1 Operating the shutter release button
(p.72)
1 Subjects that are difficult to focus on
(p.73)
1 Using the Built-in Flash (p.75)
1 Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point) (p.129)
5
Press the shutter release button
fully.
The picture is taken.
This action is referred to as "releasing the
shutter" or "release".
Focus indicator
Flash
status
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 70 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
71
Basic Operations
3
6
Review the captured image on
the monitor.
The image appears for 1 second on the
monitor shortly after capturing (Instant
Review).
1 Setting the Display for Instant
Review (p.276)
You can magnify the image during Instant
Review with the e-dial. (p.223)
You can delete the image during Instant
Review by pressing the K/i button.
1 Deleting a Single Image (p.84)
• You can set the camera so that pressing the =/L button will focus
automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button
halfway. (p.123)
• You can preview the image in the viewfinder or on the monitor and check the
composition, exposure, and focus before taking pictures. (p.137)
Delete
Delete
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 71 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
72
Basic Operations
3
Operating the shutter release button
The shutter release button has two working positions.
Pressing it down halfway (first position) displays the indicators in the
viewfinder and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully
(second position) takes a picture.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent
camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn
where the first position and second position are.
• The viewfinder indicators are displayed while the shutter release button
is pressed halfway. The indicators are displayed for about 10 seconds
(default setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after you take
your finger off the button. (p.32, p.116)
Not pressed Pressed halfway
(first position)
Pressed fully
(second position)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 72 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
73
Basic Operations
3
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult
when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply
to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.
(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in the
focusing area
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusing
area
(c) Fast moving objects
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright
background)
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within
the focusing area
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within the
focusing area
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus mode
lever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject
with the aid of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.135)
The subject may not be focused even when the ] (focus indicator) is
displayed when (e) and (f) above apply.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 73 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
74
Basic Operations
3
Using a Zoom Lens
Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with
a zoom lens. Adjust the subject to the desired size and take pictures.
1
Turn the zoom ring to the right or
left.
Turn the zoom ring clockwise for
telephoto and counterclockwise for wide
angle.
• The smaller the number displayed for the focal length, the wider the angle.
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.
• Power Zoom functions (Image Size Tracking, Zoom Clip, and Auto Zoom
Effect) are not compatible with this camera.
MF
AF
Wide Angle Telephoto
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 74 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
75
Basic Operations
3
Using the Built-in Flash
Use the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit
conditions and when you want to use the built-in flash.
The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from 0.7 m to 5 m.
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of the
corners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a
distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on the
lens being used and the set sensitivity (p.178)).
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an
external flash, refer to the “Using the Flash” (p.173).
Setting the Flash Mode
Flash Mode Function
C
Auto Flash
Discharge
The camera automatically measures the ambient light
and determines whether to use the flash. The flash
pops up and discharges automatically when necessary,
such as when using a shutter speed which is likely to
cause camera shake or in backlit conditions (except
when in s (Landscape), \ (Moving Object) or l
(Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode). The flash may pop
up but may not discharge if the camera determines that
the flash is not necessary.
b
Manual Flash
Discharge
Discharges the flash manually. Discharges when the
flash is popped up, does not discharge when retracted.
i
Auto Flash+Red-
eye Reduction
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the
automatic flash.
Compatibility of built-in flash and lens
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the
capture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to check the
compatibility.
1 Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash (p.179)
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set the
lens aperture ring to s (Auto).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 75 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
76
Basic Operations
3
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the capture
mode.
*1 This can be selected in Q (Surf & Snow), K (Food), l (Night Snap), R (Kids), and Y
(Pet) of H mode.
1
Press the four-way controller (3)
in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
The flash modes that can be selected for
the set capture mode appear.
D
Manual Flash+
Red-eye
Reduction
Discharges the flash manually. A pre-flash for red-eye
reduction is discharged before the main flash.
G
Slow-speed Sync
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the
brightness. For example, when using this to shoot a
portrait with the sunset in the background, both the
person and the background are captured beautifully.
H
Slow-speed Sync+
Red-eye
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the
main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.
I
k
Trailing Curtain
Sync
Discharges the flash immediately before closing the
shutter curtain. Captures moving objects as if they are
leaving a trail behind. (p.176)
r
Wireless Mode
You can synchronize a dedicated external flash
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync cord.
(p.183)
Capture Mode Selectable Flash Mode
I/=/s/q/\/./H
*1
C/b/i/D/r
e/K/c E
/
F
/
G
/
H
/
I
/
r
b/a E/F/k/r
Flash Mode Function
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 76 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
77
Basic Operations
3
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a flash mode.
Turn the e-dial to perform the flash
exposure compensation. (p.81)
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
1
Set the mode dial to I, =, q, . or H.
The flash is deactivated when A (Night Scene), K (Sunset), n (Stage
Lighting), Z (Night Scene HDR), U (Candlelight), or E (Museum) is
selected in H (Scene) mode. The built-in flash does not pop up when
set to l (Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode.
2
Press the shutter release button
halfway.
The built-in flash pops up if necessary
and begins charging. When the flash is
fully charged, b appears in the
viewfinder. (p.32)
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
Using Auto Flash Discharge Mode C,
i
(Automatic Flash Pop-up)
OK
MENU
0.0
Flash Mode
Cancel OK
Auto Flash Discharge
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 77 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
78
Basic Operations
3
4
Push down on the portion
indicated in the illustration to
retract the built-in flash.
1
Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up and begins
charging. The b mode is used
regardless of the flash mode setting.
When the flash is fully charged,
b appears in the viewfinder. (p.32)
2
Press the shutter release button fully.
The flash discharges and the picture is taken.
3
Push the built-in flash down to retract.
Switch between C (Auto Flash Discharge) and b (Manual Flash Discharge)
by pressing the K/i button while the built-in flash is popped up.
Using Manual Flash Discharge Mode
b
,
D
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 78 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
79
Basic Operations
3
When the mode dial is set to a (Flash Off), the built-in flash will not pop up
even if the K/i button is pressed.
Using red-eye reduction flash
“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in
photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is caused
by the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye.
Red-eye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures can
be used to combat it.
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lens
is in use.
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible when
using an external flash.
The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces a red-eye
effect by discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction
function, the pre-flash is discharged just before the shutter is
released. This reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is then
discharged while the pupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.
To use the red-eye reduction function in Picture mode or H (Scene)
mode, select D or F. Set to F or H in other modes.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 79 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
80
Basic Operations
3
Daylight-Sync Shooting
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait
picture is taken with a shadow cast on a person’s face. Use of the
flash in this way is called Daylight-Sync Shooting. The b (Manual
Flash Discharge) mode is used when shooting with Daylight-Sync
Shooting.
Taking pictures
1 Pop up the built-in flash manually and confirm that the flash
mode is set to E. (p.78)
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.
3 Take a picture.
Without Daylight-Sync With Daylight-Sync
The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 80 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
81
Basic Operations
3
You can change the flash output in a range of –2.0 to +1.0. The following
flash compensation values can be set according to the step interval set in
[1. EV Steps] (p.118) of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
1
Turn the e-dial in the [Flash Mode]
screen.
The flash compensation value is
displayed. Press the | button to reset the
flash output compensation value to 0.0.
(Available only when [Green Button] is
assigned to the | button in [Green Button]
of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu) (p.197).)
Compensating Flash Output
Step Interval Flash Compensation Value
1/3 EV
–2.0, –1.7, –1.3, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0
1/2 EV
–2.0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0
• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will
not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.
• Compensating to the minus (–) side may not affect the image if the subject is
too close, the aperture value is small or sensitivity is high.
• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which
support P-TTL auto flash mode.
MENU
+0.3
OK
OK
Flash Mode
Cancel
Manual Flash Discharge
Enabling Shooting while Charging the Flash
You can set the camera to enable
shooting while the flash is being
charged.
Set [16. Release While Charging] to [On]
in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
(p.90).
By default, pictures cannot be taken
while the built-in flash is charging.
16.
1
2
MENU
OK
OK
Release While Charging
Off
On
Enables shutter release
Cancel
while the built-in
flash is charging
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 81 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
82
Basic Operations
3
Playing Back Pictures
You can play back captured images with the camera.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera enters Playback mode and
the most recently captured image (image
with the highest file number) is displayed
on the monitor. (For movies, only the first
frame is displayed on the monitor.)
Press the M button during playback
to switch the information display such as
shooting information for the displayed
image.
Refer to p.27 for details about display
information.
2
Press the four-way controller
(45).
4: Displays the previous image.
5: Displays the next image.
Playing Back Images
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play back
pictures using a computer. Refer to “Using the Provided Software” (p.296) for
details on the software.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 82 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
83
Basic Operations
3
• Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.219) for details on the playback mode
functions.
• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still
remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save the image in RAW
format by pressing the mc button.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the corresponding
RAW image listed is saved.
• Multi-exposure RAW image with Multi-exposure
• Digital Filter RAW image without filter effect
• HDR Capture RAW image with standard exposure
• Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 83 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
84
Basic Operations
3
You can delete images one by one.
1
Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image to delete.
2
Press the K/i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Delete].
Select a file format to delete for images
saved in RAW+ format.
1
4
Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
Deleting a Single Image
• Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.240)
Delete JPEG
Deletes only the JPEG
image.
Delete RAW
Deletes only the RAW
image.
Delete
RAW+JPEG
Deletes images in both
file formats.
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”
(p.236)
Cancel
Delete
100-0105
100-0105
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 84 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
4 Shooting Functions
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced
shooting functions available with the W.
How to Operate the Shooting Functions ...........86
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode ..........91
Setting the Exposure ...........................................96
Focusing .............................................................122
Checking the Composition, Exposure and
Focus Before Shooting (Preview) .....................137
Using the Shake Reduction Function to
Prevent Camera Shake ......................................141
Taking Pictures Continuously ..........................149
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ................155
Shooting with Live View ....................................159
Recording Movies ..............................................165
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 85 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
86
Shooting Functions
4
How to Operate the Shooting
Functions
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menu or [A Custom Setting] menu.
Press the four-way controller (2345) in
Capture mode to set the following items.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.37).
Direct Keys Setting Items
Key Item Function Page
2
Drive Mode
Selects Continuous shooting, Self-
timer, Remote Control or Exposure
Bracketing shooting.
p.149
p.145
p.147
p.118
3
Flash Mode Sets the method of flash discharge. p.75
4
White Balance
Adjusts the color balance to match the
type of the light source illuminating the
subject.
p.200
5
Sensitivity Sets the ISO sensitivity. p.98
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 86 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
87
Shooting Functions
4
The following settings can be performed in
the [A Rec. Mode 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture mode to
display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items
Menu Item Function Page
A1
Custom Image
*1
Sets the image finishing tone such as color
and contrast before shooting an image.
p.213
File Format
*1
Sets the file format. p.195
JPEG Recorded
Pixels
*1
Sets the recording size of images saved in
JPEG format.
p.192
JPEG Quality
*1
Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG
format.
p.193
AF Mode
*1
Selects the autofocus mode. p.125
AE Metering
*1
Selects the part of the viewfinder to use for
measuring brightness and determining
exposure.
p.114
Select AF Point
*1
Selects the part of the viewfinder to focus on. p.129
A2
Cross
Processing
*1
Changes the hues and contrast by
performing digital cross processing.
p.216
Digital Filter
*1
Applies a digital filter effect when taking
pictures.
p.155
HDR Capture
*1
Enables capturing images at high dynamic
range.
p.209
Multi-exposure
Creates a composite picture by taking
multiple frames.
p.153
Interval Shooting
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set
time.
p.151
High-ISO NR
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction when
shooting with a high ISO sensitivity.
p.100
Slow Shutter
Speed NR
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction in slow
speed shooting.
p.102
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 87 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
88
Shooting Functions
4
*1 Can be set using the control panel.
A3
Movie Sets the movie settings. p.165
Live View Sets the Live View display settings. p.160
Instant Review Sets the Instant Review display settings. p.276
D-Range Setting
*1
Expands the dynamic range and prevents
bright and dark areas from occurring.
p.207
p.208
Lens Correction
*1
Corrects distortions and chromatic
aberrations of magnification occurring due to
lens properties.
p.211
A4
Color Space Sets the color space to use. p.205
RAW File Format
Sets the file format of images saved in RAW
format.
p.196
Green Button
Assigns the function to be called up when the
| button is pressed.
p.197
AF/AE-L Button
Assigns the function to be called up when the
=/L button is pressed.
p.120
p.123
Memory
Determines which settings to save when the
power is turned off.
p.288
Shake
Reduction
*1
Activates the Shake Reduction function. p.142
Input Focal
Length
Sets the focal length when using a lens for
which focal length information cannot be
obtained.
p.143
Menu Item Function Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 88 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
89
Shooting Functions
4
Set the [A Custom Setting 1-4] menus to fully use the functions of a SLR
camera.
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items
Menu Item Function Page
A1
1. EV Steps Sets the adjustment steps for exposure. p.118
2. Sensitivity Steps
Sets the adjustment steps for ISO
sensitivity.
p.99
3. Expanded
Sensitivity
Expands the lower and upper sensitivity
limits.
p.99
4. Meter Operating
Time
Sets the exposure metering time. p.116
5. AE-L with AF
Locked
Sets whether to lock the exposure value
when the focus is locked.
p.133
6. Link AE to AF
Point
Sets whether to link the exposure and AF
point in the focusing area during multi-
segment metering.
p.115
7. Auto Bracketing
Order
Sets the order for Exposure Bracketing
shooting.
p.118
A2
8. Superimpose AF
Area
Sets whether to display the selected AF
point in the viewfinder.
p.130
9. AF.S Setting
Sets the action priority for when = mode
is set to l and the shutter release
button is fully pressed.
p.125
10. AF.C Setting
Sets the action priority for Continuous
Shooting when = mode is set to k.
p.126
11. AF Assist Light
Sets whether to use the AF assist light
when autofocusing in dark locations.
p.127
12. WB When
Using Flash
Sets the white balance setting when using
flash.
p.201
13. AWB in
Tungsten Light
Sets whether to adjust the tungsten light
color tone when the white balance is set to
F
(Auto White Balance).
–
14. AF with Remote
Control
Sets whether to use autofocus when
shooting with remote control.
p.148
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 89 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
90
Shooting Functions
4
A3
15. Remote Control
in Bulb
Sets the remote control operation while
using the remote control with the shutter
speed set to h.
p.114
16. Release While
Charging
Sets whether to release shutter while the
built-in flash is charging.
p.81
17. Flash in
Wireless Mode
Sets the built-in flash discharge method in
the wireless mode.
p.184
18. Saving Rotation
Info
Sets whether to save rotation information
when shooting.
p.235
19. Save Menu
Location
Sets whether to save the last menu tab
displayed on the monitor and to display it
again next time the 3 button is
pressed.
p.275
20. Catch-in Focus
When set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set to
f or l and a manual focus lens is
attached, catch-in focus shooting is
enabled and the shutter is released
automatically when the subject comes into
focus.
p.136
21. AF Fine
Adjustment
Adjusts the AF focusing position. p.128
A4
22. Using Aperture
Ring
Sets whether to enable shutter release
when the lens aperture ring is set to the
position other than s.
p.314
Reset Custom
Functions
Resets all the settings in the [A Custom
Setting 1-4] menus to the defaults.
p.311
Menu Item Function Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 90 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
91
Shooting Functions
4
Selecting the Appropriate Capture
Mode
You can switch the capture modes by setting the icons on the mode dial
to the dial indicator.
The W features various shooting modes, enabling you to take pictures
with settings suited for your photographic vision.
In this manual, the capture modes are referred to as follows.
Capture Mode Mode Page
Picture modes
I (Auto Picture)/ = (Portrait)/ s (Landscape)/
q (Macro)/ \ (Moving Object)/ . (Night Scene
Portrait)/ a (Flash Off) (When shooting with Live
View, d (Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be
selected in I mode.)
p.92
H (Scene)
modes
A (Night Scene)/ Q (Surf & Snow)/ K (Food)/
K (Sunset)/ n (Stage Lighting)/ l (Night Snap)/
Z (Night Scene HDR)/ R (Kids)/ Y (Pet)/
U (Candlelight)/ E (Museum)
p.93
Exposure modes
e (Program)/ K (Sensitivity Priority)/ b (Shutter
Priority)/ c (Aperture Priority)/ a (Manual)
p.95
Movie mode C (Movie) p.165
Dial indicator
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 91 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
92
Shooting Functions
4
Set the mode dial to =, s, q, \, . or a if you cannot capture the
desired image in I (Auto Picture) mode.
The characteristics of each mode are as follows.
Picture Modes
Mode Characteristics
I Auto Picture
The optimal capture mode is automatically selected
from the U (Standard), = (Portrait), s (Landscape),
q (Macro), \ (Moving Object) and . (Night Scene
Portrait) modes. When shooting with Live View, d
(Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be selected.
=
Portrait
Optimal for capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy
and bright skin tone.
s
Landscape
Deepens the focus range, emphasizes contour and
saturation of trees and the sky, and produces a
vibrant image.
q
Macro
Lets you take vibrant pictures of flowers and other
small subjects at short distances.
\
Moving Object
Lets you take sharp pictures of a quickly moving
subject, such as at sporting events. The drive mode
is fixed to g (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).
.
Night Scene
Portrait
Lets you capture people against a night view or at dusk.
a
Flash Off
The flash is deactivated. Other settings are the same
as U (Standard) in I.
In ., even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter speeds
so the background areas beyond the flash’s reach will also appear correctly
exposed in the picture (1 Slow-speed Sync (p.174)). To prevent camera
shake, either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a
tripod.
When \ is automatically selected in I, pictures are taken in the drive
mode set beforehand.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 92 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
93
Shooting Functions
4
By setting the mode dial to H (Scene), you can choose from the
following 11 shooting scenes.
H Modes
Mode Characteristics
A Night Scene
Used for night scenes. Use a tripod, etc. to prevent
shaking.
Q Surf & Snow
For capturing images of dazzling backgrounds, such
as snowy mountains.
K Food
For capturing images of food. Saturation will be rather
high to make it look appetizing.
K Sunset For capturing sunrise or sunset in beautiful colors.
n Stage Lighting For capturing moving subjects in poorly lit place.
l Night Snap For taking snapshots in poorly lit place.
Z Night Scene HDR
Captures 3 images to generate a single HDR image.
Exposure is optimized for dim lighting
R Kids
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces healthy and
bright skin tone. The drive mode is fixed to g
(Continuous Shooting (Hi)).
Y Pet
For capturing moving pets. The drive mode is fixed to
g (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).
U Candlelight For capturing scenes in candlelight.
E Museum
For capturing images in places where a flash is
prohibited.
The flash is deactivated in A, K, n, Z, U and E. To prevent camera
shake, either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a
tripod.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 93 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
94
Shooting Functions
4
1
Set the mode dial to H.
The scene mode status screen appears.
2
Press the M button.
The icon for the currently selected
shooting scene appears in the control
panel.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [Scene Mode]
and press the 4 button.
The scene mode selection screen
appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) or e-dial to choose a
scene mode.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.
Selecting a Shooting Scene
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
15 4.0
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
123
]
JPEG
1600
12M
[
37
]
Scene Mode
Night Scene
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
OFF
OFF
Cancel
Used for night scenes.
OK
OK
MENU
Use a tripod, etc. to
prevent shaking
Night Scene
Night Scene
SCN
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 94 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
95
Shooting Functions
4
Use the exposure modes to change the sensitivity, shutter speed and
aperture and take pictures according to your own photographic vision.
When the 3 button is pressed while
the mode dial is set to H (Scene), the [H
Scene] menu appears. Press the four-way
controller (3) to display the scene mode
selection screen and you can select a scene
in the same way as described in Step 4.
Exposure Modes
Mode Characteristics
Page
e Program
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper exposure according to
Program line when taking pictures.
p.103
K
Sensitivity
Priority
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper exposure according to the
set sensitivity.
b
Shutter Priority
Lets you set the desired shutter speed to freeze or
emphasize subject movement. Take pictures of
fast moving subjects that look still or subjects that
give a sense of movement.
c
Aperture
Priority
Lets you set the desired aperture value for
controlling the depth of field. Use it to obtain a
blurred or sharp background.
a Manual
Lets you set the shutter speed and aperture value
to capture the picture with creative intent.
MENU
Exit
Used for night scenes.
Use a tripod, etc. to
prevent shaking
Night Scene
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 95 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
96
Shooting Functions
4
Setting the Exposure
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by a combination of shutter
speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations of
shutter speed and aperture value for a particular subject. Different
combinations produce different effects.
By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressed
in the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture
you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating
different effects.
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.
Using slower shutter speed
If the subject is moving, the image will be
blurred because the shutter is open longer.
It is possible to enhance the effect of
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) by
intentionally using a slower shutter speed.
Using faster shutter speed
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow
freezing the action of a moving subject.
A faster shutter speed also helps to
prevent camera shake.
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area that
appears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the
focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead
you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed
Effect of Shutter Speed
Effect of Aperture
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 96 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
97
Shooting Functions
4
Opening the aperture (reduce the aperture value)
Objects closer and farther than the focused
subject will be more out of focus. For
instance, if you take a picture of a flower
against a landscape with the aperture open,
the landscape in front and behind the flower
will be blurred, emphasizing only the flower.
Closing the aperture (increase the aperture value)
The range in focus expands forward and
backward. For instance, if you take a picture
of a flower against a landscape with the
aperture narrowed, the landscape in front
and behind the flower will be in focus.
Aperture and Depth of Field
The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth of
field.
The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used and
the distance to the subject.
• The depth of field for the W differs depending on the lens but
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject,
the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have a
scale for depth of field because of their designs).
Aperture
Open Close
(Smaller value) (Larger value)
Depth of field Shallow Deep
Area of focus Narrow Wide
Lens focal length
Longer Shorter
(Telephoto) (Wide-angle)
Distance to the subject Near Far
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 97 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
98
Shooting Functions
4
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent
to ISO 200 to 12800. The default setting is [AUTO].
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in Capture mode.
The [Sensitivity] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [AUTO Setting] or [Fixed
Value].
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the ISO
sensitivity.
For [AUTO Setting], change the maximum sensitivity.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Setting the Sensitivity
OK
MENU
ISO
ISO
AUTO
200
1600
200
Cancel
Sensitivity
OK
AUTO Setting
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 98 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
99
Shooting Functions
4
• When the capture mode is set to n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap) or Z
(Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode, or when the mode dial is set to C
(Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to AUTO and cannot be changed.
• When the capture mode is set to K (Sensitivity Priority) or a (Manual),
[AUTO Setting] is not displayed.
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 100 to 25600 when
[3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89) is set to
[On]. However, the minimum sensitivity is ISO 200 when [Highlight
Correction] (p.207) is set to [On].
• Captured images may show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You can
reduce image noise by setting [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu.
(p.100)
• You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or in
accordance with the EV step setting for exposure (p.118). This can be set in
[2. Sensitivity Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89).
Expanding the Dynamic Range
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by
the CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger
it is, the better the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear
in the picture.
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level
expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for
bright area to occur in the image.
To expand the dynamic range, make the settings in [D-Range
Setting] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.207)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 99 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
100
Shooting Functions
4
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or
unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.
- when shooting with a long exposure
- when shooting with a high sensitivity setting
- when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. However, images
shot with Noise Reduction will take longer to save.
Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.
1
Select [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Auto], [Off],
[Low], [Medium], [High] or
[Custom].
3
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Auto], [Off], [Low], [Medium] or [High], proceed to Step 7.
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)
High-ISO NR
Auto
Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated
levels throughout ISO range. (default setting)
Off Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.
Low/Medium/High
Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level
throughout ISO range.
Custom
Applies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels for
each ISO setting.
High-ISO NR
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Off
Low
Medium
Auto
Custom
High
ISO
NR
AUTO
ISO
NR
CUSTOM
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 100 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
101
Shooting Functions
4
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Setting] and
press the four-way controller (5).
The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the sensitivity
appears.
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a sensitivity value and
use the four-way controller (45)
to set the level of noise reduction
which is applied to the selected
sensitivity.
Turn the e-dial to display the [High-ISO
NR 2] screen.
Press the | button to reset the settings.
The sensitivity values displayed vary according to the [1. EV Steps] and
[2. Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu
(p.89).
6
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
MENU
100
ISO
200
ISO
400
ISO
1600
ISO
3200
ISO
6400
ISO
800
ISO
1 2
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
OFF
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
High-ISO NR
Reset
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 101 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
102
Shooting Functions
4
Reduces noise during long exposures.
1
Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [AUTO], [ON] or [OFF],
and press the 4 button.
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Slow Shutter Speed NR
AUTO
Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, and
internal temperature, and automatically applies Noise Reduction
as necessary. (default setting)
ON
Applies Noise Reduction when the exposure time is longer than
1 second.
OFF Does not apply Noise Reduction.
• Processing may take a while when shooting with Slow Shutter Speed NR set
to [ON]. Pictures cannot be taken while an image is being processed.
• When the Noise Reduction function is activated, [nr] blinks on the status
screen and in the viewfinder where the aperture value is normally displayed,
and a countdown of processing time is displayed where the shutter speed is
normally displayed.
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 2
3
4
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
ISO
NR
AUTO
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
NR
OFF
NR
ON
NR
AUTO
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 102 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
103
Shooting Functions
4
This camera features the following five exposure modes. Use the mode
dial to change the exposure mode. (p.91)
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.
(z: Available #: Restricted × : Not available)
*1 In [Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can make the setting so that the
shutter speed and/or aperture value can be changed by turning the e-dial. (p.105)
Changing the Exposure Mode
Exposure
Mode
Description
EV Com-
pensation
Change
Shutter
Speed
Change
Aperture
Value
Change
Sensi-
tivity
Page
e
Program
Automatically sets
the shutter speed
and aperture value
to obtain a proper
exposure
according to
Program line when
taking pictures.
z #
*1
#
*1
z p.104
K
Sensitivity
Priority
Automatically sets
the shutter speed
and aperture value
to obtain a proper
exposure
according to the
set sensitivity.
z ××
Other
than
AUTO
p.106
b
Shutter
Priority
Lets you set the
desired shutter
speed for
expressing moving
subjects.
zz × z p.107
c
Aperture
Priority
Lets you set the
aperture value for
controlling the
depth of field.
z × zzp.108
a
Manual
Lets you set the
shutter speed and
aperture value to
capture the picture
with creative
intent.
× zz
Other
than
AUTO
p.110
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 103 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
104
Shooting Functions
4
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper
exposure according to Program line when taking pictures.
You can also use the e-dial to change the shutter speed and aperture
value while maintaining the proper exposure. (p.105)
1
Set the mode dial to e.
2
Turn the e-dial while pressing
the mc button to adjust the
exposure.
Using the e (Program) Mode
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring
When using a lens with an aperture
ring, set the aperture to the s (AUTO)
position while holding down the auto-
lock button on the lens.
A
22
16
11
85.6
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 104 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
105
Shooting Functions
4
The EV compensation value is
displayed in the status screen and
viewfinder.
• EV compensation value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
and aperture value when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (p.98).
P
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
125 5.6
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
200
JPEG
EV compensation value
E-dial in Program
You can set the function of the e-dial when
turned in
e
mode. Set in [Green Button] of
the [
A
Rec. Mode 4] menu. (This
operation is available only when [Green
Button] is assigned to the
|
button.)
(p.197)
If the
|
button is pressed after turning the
e-dial, the camera returns to normal
e
mode.
P SHIFT
Automatically adjusts the shutter speed and aperture value to
obtain a proper exposure (Program shift). (default setting)
b Sets the shutter speed.
c Sets the aperture value.
OFF Disables the e-dial operation when turned in e mode.
MENU
OK
Tv
Av
OFF
P SHIFT
OK
Green Button
Action in M Mode
Green Button
E-dial in Program
Shifts combination of the
Cancel
aperture and shutter speed
to obtain proper exposure
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 105 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
106
Shooting Functions
4
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.
The shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set according to
the selected sensitivity to obtain a proper exposure.
1
Set the mode dial to K.
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the
sensitivity.
The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode
• You can set the sensitivity to a value equivalent to ISO 200 to 12800. [AUTO]
is not available.
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.117)
• The sensitivity can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
30 4.5
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
200
JPEG
Sv
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 106 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
107
Shooting Functions
4
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed
to have the subject show movement.
The aperture value is automatically set to give a proper exposure
depending on the shutter speed.
1Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)
1
Set the mode dial to b.
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the
shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.
The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode
Tv
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
125 5.6
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
400
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 107 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
108
Shooting Functions
4
Set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field
is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear when the
aperture is set to a large value, a small lens opening. The depth of field is
shallower and the front and back of the focused object is blurred when the
aperture is set to a small value, large lens opening.
The shutter speed is automatically set to the proper exposure depending
on the aperture value.
1Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)
1
Set the mode dial to c.
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.117)
• The shutter speed can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (
p.98
).
Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the aperture value will blink in the status
screen and viewfinder. If the subject is
too bright, choose a faster shutter
speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When the
aperture value indication stops blinking, you can take a picture with
proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 108 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
109
Shooting Functions
4
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the
aperture value.
The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.117)
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture value
when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (
p.98
).
Av
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
30 4.5
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
400
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the shutter speed will blink in the status
screen and viewfinder. When the
subject is too bright, set the aperture to a smaller lens opening (larger
number), and when too dark, set the aperture to a larger lens opening
(smaller number). Once blinking stops, you can take a picture with
proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 109 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
110
Shooting Functions
4
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitable
to take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode is
convenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter
speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker)
or overexposed (brighter) photographs.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)
1
Set the mode dial to a.
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the
shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.
3
Turn the e-dial while pressing the
mc button to adjust the
aperture value.
Using the a (Manual) Mode
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 110 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
111
Shooting Functions
4
The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.
On the status screen, the e-dial indicator
appears next to the shutter speed or
aperture value, depending on which is
being adjusted.
Of the shutter speed and aperture value,
the value being adjusted is underlined in
the viewfinder.
While adjusting the shutter speed or
aperture value, the difference from the
proper exposure (EV value) appears in
the viewfinder. The proper exposure is
set when [0.0] is displayed.
The EV compensation value blinks in the
viewfinder when the difference from the
proper exposure becomes ±3.0 or larger.
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the mode dial is set to a, the
sensitivity is set to the last set value.
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or
1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1]
menu. (p.118)
• The aperture value can also be changed by pressing the mc button once,
taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, the
aperture value is set when the mc button is pressed again or the exposure
metering timer (p.116) elapses.
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
125 5.6
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
200
M
Difference from the
proper exposure
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 111 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
112
Shooting Functions
4
Using AE Lock
When [AF/AE-L Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu is set to [AE
Lock] and the exposure is locked (p.120) by pressing the =/L
button in a mode, if the shutter speed or aperture value is changed,
the combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes while
the exposure value is retained.
Example) If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec. and aperture is F5.6 and
these settings are locked with the =/L button, the
aperture automatically changes to F11 if the shutter speed
is changed to 1/30 sec. with the e-dial.
Action in a Mode
You can set the function of the | button
when the camera is set to a mode. Set
in [Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode
4] menu. (This operation is available
only when [Green Button] is assigned to
the | button. (p.197))
P LINE
Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to obtain a proper
exposure according to the Program Line. (default setting)
Tv SHIFT
Adjusts the shutter speed while the aperture value remains
fixed to obtain a proper exposure.
Av SHIFT
Adjusts the aperture value while the shutter speed remains
fixed to obtain a proper exposure.
OFF Disables the | button operation when pressed in a mode.
MENU
OK
OFF
TvSHIFT
P LINE
AvSHIFT
OK
Green Button
Action in M Mode
Green Button
E-dial in Program
Sets the aperture and
Cancel
shutter speed to the
Program Line exposure
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 112 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
113
Shooting Functions
4
This setting is useful when shooting night scenes and fireworks which
require the long exposures.
1
Set the mode dial to a.
2
Turn the e-dial to the left (f) and
set the shutter speed to h.
h appears after the slowest shutter
speed (30 sec.).
3
Press the shutter release button.
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept
pressed.
Using the Bulb Shooting
In Bulb shooting, the following functions are not available.
- EV Compensation
- Exposure Bracketing
- Continuous Shooting
- Interval Shooting
- HDR Capture
M
AF.A
ISO
ISO
Bulb
5.6
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
200
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 113 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
114
Shooting Functions
4
Choose the part of the viewfinder to use for measuring brightness and
determining exposure. The following three methods are available.
L Multi-segment Metering (default setting)
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in
16 different zones. Even in backlit
locations, this mode automatically
determines what level of brightness is in
which portion and automatically adjusts
exposure.
• Turn the e-dial while holding down the mc button to adjust the aperture
value.
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off during Bulb
shooting.
• Use a sturdy tripod to prevent camera shake during Bulb shooting.
• To operate the shutter release button on the remote control, set in [15.
Remote Control in Bulb] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90).
• You can reduce image noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by
the slow shutter speed. Set in [Slow Shutter Speed NR] of the [A Rec.
Mode 2] menu. (p.102)
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the shutter speed is set to h,
the sensitivity is set to the last set value.
• The upper sensitivity limit for Bulb shooting is ISO 1600.
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we
recommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when shooting with
a long exposure setting as the battery is being drained while the shutter
remains open. (p.50)
Selecting the Metering Method
Multi-segment metering method is not available when using a lens other than
a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens, or when the lens aperture ring is set
to the position other than s.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 114 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
115
Shooting Functions
4
M Center-weighted Metering
Metering is weighted at the center of the
viewfinder. Use this metering when you want
to compensate the exposure by experience,
instead of leaving it to the camera. The
illustration shows that sensitivity increases
as the pattern height increases (center).
This mode does not automatically
compensate for backlit scenes.
N Spot Metering
The brightness is measured only within a
limited area at the center of the viewfinder.
You can use this in combination with the AE
Lock (p.120) when the subject is extremely
small and the correct exposure is difficult to
obtain.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-segment
Metering
In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89),
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during
multi-segment metering.
1
Off Exposure is set separately from the AF point. (default setting)
2
On Exposure is set in accordance with the AF point.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 115 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
116
Shooting Functions
4
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [AE Metering]
and press the 4 button.
The [AE Metering] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a metering method.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
AE Metering
Multi-segment
OFF
OFF
MENU
OK
OK
AE Metering
Multi-segment
Cancel
Setting the Meter Operating Time
You can set the exposure metering time to [10 sec.] (default setting),
[3 sec.] or [30 sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] of the [A Custom
Setting 1] menu (p.89).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 116 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
117
Shooting Functions
4
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose
(darken) your picture.
The exposure steps can be selected from 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps]
of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
You can adjust the EV compensation value from –3 to +3 (EV).
1
Turn the e-dial while pressing the
mc button.
The exposure is adjusted.
m is displayed in the status screen and
viewfinder during adjustment.
Adjusting the Exposure
• EV compensation is not available when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
• The EV compensation is not canceled by turning the camera off or by
switching to another capture mode.
• If [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.197), the compensation value is reset to 0.0 when the |
button is pressed.
• EV compensation can also be changed by pressing the mc button once,
taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, EV
compensation is set when the mc button is pressed again or the exposure
metering timer (p.116) elapses.
mc button
Av
AF.A
1/
ISO
ISO
AUTO
30 4.5
F
1122+3-3
AWB
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
400
Compensation value
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 117 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
118
Shooting Functions
4
Set the exposure compensation steps to
increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV
Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu
(p.89).
You can take three consecutive images at three different exposure levels
when the shutter release button is pressed. The first image is exposed with
no compensation, the second image is underexposed (negative
compensation) and the third image is overexposed (positive
compensation).
You can set [7. Auto Bracketing Order] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu
(p.89).
Changing the Exposure Steps
Step Interval Exposure Setting Value
1/3 EV ±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0
1/2 EV ±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0
Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting
(Exposure Bracketing)
Standard exposure Underexposure Overexposure
1 0 - + Standard ´ Underexposed ´ Overexposed (default setting)
2 - 0 + Underexposed ´ Standard ´ Overexposed
3 + 0 - Overexposed ´ Standard ´ Underexposed
4 0 + - Standard ´ Overexposed ´ Underexposed
1.
1
2
MENU
OK
OK
EV Steps
1/3 EV Steps
1/2 EV Steps
Exposure compensation steps
Cancel
now set to 1/3 EV
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 118 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
119
Shooting Functions
4
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select l.
3
Turn the e-dial to set the bracket value.
The following bracket values can be set according to the step interval set
in [1. EV Steps] (p.118) of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
Available operations
4
Press the 4 button.
The value for the first image blinks on the monitor.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to \ (Moving Object), or R (Kids)/Y (Pet)/
Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode
- when the shutter speed is set to h
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.
The function selected last is used.
Step Interval Bracket Value
1/3 EV ±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0
1/2 EV ±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0
mc button + e-dial Adjusts the EV compensation only when taking
underexposed or overexposed image with Exposure
Bracketing. Images are taken with an EV
compensation value set to 0 (intermediate value).
| button Resets the compensation value to ±0. (Available only
when [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in
[Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
(p.197).)
MENU
112233
±0.5EV
OK
OK
Drive Mode
Cancel
Exposure Bracketing
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 119 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
120
Shooting Functions
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder, and EV compensation
value appears in the status screen and viewfinder when focused.
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
Continue to press the shutter release button until three images are
captured.
Three consecutive images will be taken according to the order set in
[7. Auto Bracketing Order] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89).
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking a picture. Use
this when the subject is too small or is backlit and a proper exposure
setting cannot be obtained.
1
Select [AF/AE-L Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [AF/AE-L Button] screen appears.
• When [AF Mode] is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in
the first image and is used for subsequent images.
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of
the exposure metering timer (default setting is approx. 20 seconds) (p.116)
and you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this case,
autofocus works for each image. After about twice the amount of the
exposure metering timer elapses, the camera returns to settings for taking
the first image.
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or an external
flash (P-TTL auto only) to change only the flash output continuously.
However, when using an external flash, holding the shutter release button
down to take three consecutive images may cause the second and third
images to be taken before the flash is fully charged. Take each image after
confirming that charging is complete.
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting
(AE Lock)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 120 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
121
Shooting Functions
4
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [AE Lock].
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
5
Set the exposure and press the
=/L button.
The camera locks the exposure
(brightness) at that instant.
@ is displayed in the status screen and
viewfinder while the AE Lock is
engaged.
• The exposure remains locked as long as the =/L button is kept
pressed or the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure
remains locked for twice the amount of the exposure metering timer (p.116)
even after taking your finger off the =/L button.
• You will hear a beep when the =/L button is pressed. The beep can
be turned off. (p.269)
• AE Lock is not available when the shutter speed is set to h.
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE Lock is canceled.
-the =/L button is pressed again
-the Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed
- the mode dial is turned
- the lens is changed
- the lens with an s (Auto) position is set to other than the s position
• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on
the zooming position even while the AE Lock is engaged when using a zoom
lens for which the maximum aperture varies depending on the focal length.
However, the exposure value does not change and a picture is taken at a
brightness level set when the AE Lock is activated.
• The exposure can also be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L
with AF Locked] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.133)
Locks the exposure value
MENU
when the AF/AE-L button
is pressed
AF/AE-L Button
Cancel OK
OK
AF1
AF2
AE-L
AF
Enable AF1
Enable AF2
Cancel AF
AE Lock
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 121 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
122
Shooting Functions
4
Focusing
You can focus with the following methods.
You can also choose the autofocus mode from l (Single mode) where
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and
the focus is locked at that position, k (Continuous mode) where the
subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter release
button is pressed halfway, and f (Auto) which automatically switches
between l and k. The default setting is f.
1 Setting the AF Mode (p.125)
1
Set the focus mode lever to =.
=
Autofocus
The camera automatically focuses on the subject
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
\
Manual focus Manually adjust the focus.
Using the Autofocus
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 122 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
123
Shooting Functions
4
2
Look through the viewfinder and
press the shutter release button
halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)
1 Subjects that are difficult to focus on
(p.73)
You can set the camera so that focusing is performed when the =/L
button is pressed. Use this setting when the autofocus by pressing the
shutter release button halfway is not desired.
1
Select [AF/AE-L Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [AF/AE-L Button] screen appears.
Using the =/L Button to Focus on the Subject
Focus Indicator
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 123 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
124
Shooting Functions
4
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Enable AF1] or
[Enable AF2].
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
5
Press the =/L button while
looking through the viewfinder.
Autofocus is performed.
Enable AF1
Autofocus is performed by using the =/L button or
the shutter release button. (default setting)
Enable AF2
Autofocus is performed only when the =/L button is
pressed and not when the shutter release button is pressed
halfway.
Cancel AF
\ appears in the viewfinder while the =/L button is
pressed. Autofocus is not performed when the shutter
release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the =/
L button to return to normal autofocus mode.)
AE Lock
The exposure setting is locked when the =/L button
is pressed. (p.120)
AF/AE-L Button
AF is performed when the
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
AF/AE-L button is pressed
Enable AF1
Enable AF2
Cancel AF
AE Lock
AF1
AF2
AE-L
AF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 124 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
125
Shooting Functions
4
You can choose from the following three autofocus modes.
Setting the AF Mode
f
Auto
Switches automatically between l and k modes
according to the subject. (default setting)
• [AF Mode] is fixed to f in I (Auto Picture) mode.
• Even if f is selected, [AF Mode] is fixed to l when taking
pictures by using Live View with the mode dial set to e, K, b,
c or a.
l
Single mode
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on
the subject, the focus is locked at that position (Focus Lock). To
focus on another subject, take your finger off the shutter release
button first, then press the shutter release button halfway again.
• [AF Mode] is fixed to l in = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q
(Macro), . (Night Scene Portrait) and a (Flash Off) of Picture
mode or A (Night Scene), Q (Surf & Snow), K (Food), K
(Sunset), Z (Night Scene HDR), U (Candlelight), and E
(Museum) of H (Scene) mode.
• The AF assist light turns on as necessary. (p.127)
• Set the action priority for when the shutter release button is
pressed fully in [9. AF.S Setting] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu
(p.89).
1 Focus-priority
The shutter cannot be released until the
subject is in focus. (default setting)
If the subject is too close to the camera,
move back and take the picture. If the
subject is difficult to focus (p.73), adjust
the focus manually. (p.134)
2
Release-priority
The shutter can be released even if the
subject is not in focus.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 125 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
126
Shooting Functions
4
1
Set the focus mode lever to =.
2
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [AF Mode]
and press the 4 button.
The [AF Mode] screen appears.
k
Continuous
mode
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the
shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator ]
appears in the viewfinder and you will hear a beep. Even if the
subject is not in focus, the shutter can be released when the
shutter release button is pressed fully.
• Available only when the mode dial is set to e, K, b, c or a.
• [AF Mode] is fixed to k in \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode
and n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap), R (Kids), and Y (Pet)
of H (Scene) mode.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the
=/L button is used to adjust the focus, the camera
automatically tracks the subject if it is determined to be a moving
object.
• Set the action priority for Continuous Shooting in [10. AF.C
Setting] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.89).
1 Focus-priority
Takes pictures giving priority to keeping
the subject in focus during Continuous
Shooting. (default setting)
2
FPS-priority
Takes pictures giving priority to the
shooting speed during Continuous
Shooting.
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
AF Mode
AF.A
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 126 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
127
Shooting Functions
4
4
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an AF mode.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
• [AF Mode] cannot be changed when the capture mode is set to Picture mode
or H (Scene) mode.
• Always set the camera to l when using the Quick-Shift Focus System on
a DA lens.
MENU
AF.S
AF.S
AF.C
AF.C
OK
AF.A
AF.A
AF Mode
Cancel OK
You can set whether or not to use the AF assist light during l
mode in [11. AF Assist Light] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.89).
1On
To make focusing easier when the subject is in a dark location,
the AF assist light turns on when the shutter release button is
pressed halfway. (default setting)
2 Off The AF assist light will not be used.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 127 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
128
Shooting Functions
4
You can adjust the AF focusing position.
1
Select [21. AF Fine Adjustment] in the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [21. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to adjust the value.
Available operations
4
Press the 4 button.
The adjustment value is saved.
5
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
AF Fine Adjustment
• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should
be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture
images with the appropriate focus.
• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the
accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test
shots.
Four-way controller (5) Adjusts the focus to a closer position.
Four-way controller (4) Adjusts the focus to a farther position.
| button Resets the adjustment value to ±0.
21.
AF Fine Adjustment
MENU
±0
Cancel OK
OK
+3
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 128 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
129
Shooting Functions
4
6
Take a test picture.
You can easily check the focusing point by enlarging the image during
Digital Preview (p.140) or Live View (p.159).
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to.
Selected AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [Select AF
Point] and press the 4 button.
The [Select AF Point] screen appears.
Select [Off] in Step 2 to negate an effect of the adjustment value (however, this
does not reset the value).
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)
b
Auto
(5 AF Points)
Out of the 5 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF
point even if the subject is not centered. (default setting)
c
Auto
(11 AF Points)
Out of the 11 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF
point even if the subject is not centered.
S Select
Sets the focusing area to the user selected point from
eleven points in the AF frame.
O Spot Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.
12M
[
37
]
Select AF Point
Auto (5 AF Points)
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 129 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
130
Shooting Functions
4
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a focusing area.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
1
Set the focusing area to S and
press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
• AF point(s) are not illuminated red in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for
[8. Superimpose AF Area] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.
• The focusing area is fixed to O regardless of this setting when using lenses
other than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses.
Setting the Focus Position in the AF Frame
Select AF Point
Auto (5 AF Points)
MENU
AUTO
Cancel OK
OK
Select AF Point
MENU
Cancel OK
OK
Select
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 130 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
131
Shooting Functions
4
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to change the AF
point.
The selected AF point appears in the
status screen.
Available operations
The AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder
(Superimpose AF Area) and you can
check where you set the AF point.
4 button Returns the AF point to the center of the AF
frame.
Press and hold 4 button Disables changing the AF point and enables
direct key operation of the four-way controller
(2345). To enable changing the AF point,
press the 4 button while direct key
operation is enabled. You will hear a beep
when switching between enabled and
disabled.
The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned off
or the focusing area is switched to b, c or O.
AF.A
1/
ISO
AUTO
20 5.6
AWB
F
1122+3-3
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
800
AUTO
PICT
OK
1
S
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 131 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
132
Shooting Functions
4
If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot
automatically focus on the subject. In this case, set [AF Mode] to l
(Single mode) first, focus the camera on the subject in the focusing area,
lock the focus at that position (Focus Lock), and then recompose your
picture.
1
Set [AF Mode] to l.
Refer to p.125.
2
Frame the desired composition
for your picture in the viewfinder.
3
Center the subject to focus in the
viewfinder and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)
4
Lock the focus.
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain
locked.
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock)
Example)
The person is out of
focus and the background is
focused instead.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 132 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
133
Shooting Functions
4
5
Recompose the picture while
keeping the shutter release
button pressed halfway.
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ] is displayed.
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be out
of focus.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.269)
• You cannot set the focus lock when [AF Mode] is set to k (Continuous
mode), or the capture mode is set to \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode, or
n (Stage Lighting), R (Kids), Y (Pet) or l (Night Snap) of H (Scene)
mode. In such cases, the autofocus continues to focus on the subject until
the shutter is released (Continuous Autofocus).
Locking Exposure when the Focus is Locked
Set [5. AE-L with AF Locked] in the
[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89) to
lock the exposure value while the focus
is locked. By default, the exposure is
not locked when the focus is locked.
1
Off Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)
2
On Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.
5.
1
2
MENU
OK
AE-L with AF Locked
Off
On
AE is locked
Cancel
when the focus
is locked
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 133 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
134
Shooting Functions
4
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus
indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in
focus even during manual focus.
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].
1
Set the focus mode lever to \.
2
Look through the viewfinder,
press the shutter release button
halfway and turn the focusing
ring.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus.
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)
Using the Focus Indicator
MF
AF
Focus Indicator
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 134 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
135
Shooting Functions
4
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.
1
Set the focus mode lever to \.
2
Look through the viewfinder and
turn the focusing ring until the
subject is clearly visible in the
viewfinder.
• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the
subject is difficult to focus (p.73) and the focus indicator will not appear.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.269)
Using the Viewfinder Matte Field
MF
AF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 135 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
136
Shooting Functions
4
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode
When [20. Catch-in Focus] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90)
is set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set to f or l and one of the
following types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting is
enabled and the shutter is released automatically when the subject
comes into focus.
• Manual focus lens
• DA or FA lens that has an = and \ setting on the lens (the
setting on the lens must be set to \ before shooting)
How to Take Pictures
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.
2 Set the focus mode lever to =.
3 Set [AF Mode] to f or l.
4 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.
5 Press the shutter release button fully.
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes
into focus at the set position.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 136 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
137
Shooting Functions
4
Checking the Composition, Exposure
and Focus Before Shooting (Preview)
You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition,
exposure and focus before taking a picture.
There are two preview methods.
First, assign the preview function to the | button.
1
Select [Green Button] in the
[A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Green Button] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Preview Method Description
| Optical Preview For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.
e Digital Preview
For checking the composition, exposure and focus on
the monitor.
You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on the
monitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check the
settings by enlarging the image. Refer to p.159 for details.
Assigning the Preview Function to the Green
Button
Exit
MENU
12
3
4
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
Memory
Color Space
RAW File Format
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length 35mm
sRGB
PEF
AF1
MENU
P LINE
P SHIFT
Green Button
Action in M Mode
Green Button
E-dial in Program
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 137 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
138
Shooting Functions
4
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Optical Preview]
or [Digital Preview] and press the
4 button.
If you selected [Optical Preview], proceed
to Step 6.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge
Instant Review].
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The preview function is assigned to the | button and the camera is
ready to take a picture.
While shooting with Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure or Live View, Optical
Preview is used regardless of the setting.
Green Button
MENU
Cancel OK
OK
Custom Image
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
Green Button
Cross Processing
One Push File Format
RAW
Digital Filter
Green Button
Digital Preview
MENU
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 138 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
139
Shooting Functions
4
1
Position the subject inside the AF
frame and press the shutter
release button halfway to focus
on the subject.
2
Press the | button while looking
through the viewfinder.
You can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder while the | button is pressed.
During this time, no shooting information
is displayed in the viewfinder, and the
shutter cannot be released.
3
Take your finger off the | button.
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.
Displaying the Optical Preview
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 139 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
140
Shooting Functions
4
1
Focus on the subject, then
compose the picture in the
viewfinder and press the |
button.
The icon (|) appears on the monitor
during preview and you can check the
composition, exposure and focus.
Available operations
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.
Displaying the Digital Preview
E-dial Enlarges the preview image. (p.223)
M button Saves the preview image. Select [Save as]
and press the 4 button.
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.
INFO
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 140 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
141
Shooting Functions
4
Using the Shake Reduction Function
to Prevent Camera Shake
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when
the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures in
situations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction
function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower
shutter speed without a risk of camera shake.
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following
situations.
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,
on cloudy days and in the shade
• When taking telephoto pictures
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function
•
The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by subject
movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter speed.
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake
Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very
slow shutter speed, for example when panning or shooting night scenes. In
this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake Reduction function and use
the camera with a tripod.
Picture taken with
the Shake Reduction function
Blurred picture
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 141 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
142
Shooting Functions
4
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the 4
button.
The [Shake Reduction] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select k or l.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
k appears in the viewfinder and the
Shake Reduction function is activated.
Setting the Shake Reduction Function
k
Uses Shake Reduction. (default
setting)
l Does not use Shake Reduction.
12M
[
37
]
Shake Reduction
On
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
OFF
OFF
OK
MENU
Shake Reduction
Cancel OK
On
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 142 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
143
Shooting Functions
4
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information
such as focal length.
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens
information is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction function
is activated.
If you use a lens whose information such as focal length cannot be
automatically obtained (p.312), the [Input Focal Length] setting screen
appears when the camera is turned on with the Shake Reduction function
set to k.
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.
• Be sure to turn the Shake Reduction function off when using the camera with
a tripod.
•
The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following situations.
- Self-timer shooting
- Remote Control shooting
- when the shutter speed is set to h
- when [Auto Align] is set to P (Off) in the [HDR Capture] setting
- when using the flash in the wireless mode
•
The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned on when the capture
mode is set to
Z
(Night Scene HDR) of
H
(Scene) mode.
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.88).
•
The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right
after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the
Shake Reduction function to become stable, and then press the shutter button
gently. If
k
appears in the viewfinder when you press the shutter release
button halfway, the camera is ready to take a picture.
•
The Shake Reduction
function
is available with any
W
compatible PENTAX
lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to other than the
s
(Auto) position
or a lens without an
s
position is used, the camera will not operate unless [22.
Using Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [
A
Custom Setting 4] menu. Set
this beforehand. In such cases, however, some functions will be restricted. Refer
to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for details.
When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected
• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens
whose information such as focal length can be automatically obtained.
• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture
set to a position other than the s position, set [22. Using Aperture Ring] in
the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. (p.314)
• The effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well
as focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as
effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 143 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
144
Shooting Functions
4
1
Use the four-way controller (
45
)
or the e-dial to set the focal length.
Select from the following 34 focal length
values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)
2
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
8 101215182024283035
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
550 600 700 800
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting
being used in the same manner.
To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.88).
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
Input Focal Length
135
120
100
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 144 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
145
Shooting Functions
4
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
4
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select g or Z.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Shooting with Self-timer
g
Self-timer
(12 sec.)
Shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode to
include the photographer in the picture.
Z
Self-timer
(2 sec.)
A mirror pops up immediately after shutter release button is
pressed (Mirror lock-up function). The shutter is released after
about 2 seconds. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when
the shutter release button is pressed.
The AE Lock function is activated and exposure is locked
immediately before the mirror pops up.
OK
MENU
2s
2s
Drive Mode
Cancel OK
Self-timer (12 sec.)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 145 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
146
Shooting Functions
4
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when the subject is in focus.
7
Press the shutter release button
fully.
For g, the self-timer lamp starts blinking
slowly and blinks rapidly 2 seconds
before the shutter is released. The beep
is heard and the rate increases. The
shutter will be released about 12 seconds
after the shutter release button is pressed fully.
For Z, the shutter will be released about 2 seconds after the shutter
release button is pressed fully.
• The self-timer shooting is not available when the capture mode is set to \
(Moving Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene)
mode.
• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if
[Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g or Z is set.
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.269)
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
function (p.120). The light entering viewfinder has no effect on the exposure
when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 146 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
147
Shooting Functions
4
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote
control unit (p.323).
You can select from the following two settings for remote control shooting.
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.
4
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select hor i.
The self-timer lamp will blink and the
camera is in a stand-by status.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional)
h
Remote Control
The shutter is released immediately after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
i
Remote Control
(3s delay)
The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
OK
MENU
Drive Mode
Cancel OK
Remote Control
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 147 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
148
Shooting Functions
4
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
7
Point the remote control unit
towards the remote control
receiver on the front of the
camera and press the shutter
release button on the remote
control unit.
The operating distance of the remote
control unit is about 4 m from the front of the camera.
After a picture is taken, the self-timer lamp lights for 2 seconds and then
returns to blinking.
• The remote control shooting is not available when the capture mode is set to
\ (Moving Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene)
mode.
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with the remote control unit. Focus on
the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.
When [14. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 2]
menu (p.89), you can use the remote control unit to adjust the focus. (AF
cannot be used with the remote control unit during Live View.)
• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, AF can be operated with
the S button. The { button cannot be used.
• When using the remote control unit, the built-in flash does not pop up
automatically even when set to g (Auto Flash Discharge). Press the K/
i button to pop up the built-in flash beforehand. (p.78)
• Select a mode other than hor i in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
remote control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned
off if [Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when hor i is set.
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
function (p.120). The light entering the viewfinder has no effect on the
exposure when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.
• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.
Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve a
fee).
4 m
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 148 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
149
Shooting Functions
4
Taking Pictures Continuously
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is kept
pressed.
The following two types of continuous shooting are available.
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
3
Press the four-way controller (3)
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select g or h.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
Continuous Shooting
g
Continuous
Shooting (Hi)
For JPEG image with E/C, up to 25 frames are
taken continuously at approximately 6 fps. The shooting
interval will increase as the buffer fills up.
h
Continuous
Shooting (Lo)
For JPEG image with E/C, pictures are taken
continuously at approximately 2 fps until the SD Memory
Card is full.
When the file format is [RAW], up to 12 frames for g and up to 36 frames for
h can be taken continuously.
OK
MENU
Drive Mode
Cancel OK
Continuous Shooting (Hi)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 149 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
150
Shooting Functions
4
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.
• The drive mode is fixed to g when the capture mode is set to \ (Moving
Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.
• If [AF Mode] is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in the
first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.
• Focusing is continuously activated during continuous shooting when
[AF Mode] is set to k (Continuous mode).
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the
built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before the
built-in flash is ready in [16. Release While Charging] of the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu. (p.81)
• Select a mode other than g or h in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
continuous shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off
if [Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu.
• The shooting speed may be slower when [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-
Chromatic-Ab Adj] (p.211) is set to [On].
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 150 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
151
Shooting Functions
4
During Interval Shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set time.
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Interval].
When taking two or more pictures, set the
wait time until the next picture is taken.
Use the four-way controller (45) to
select the number of hours, minutes, and
seconds, and use the four-way controller
(23) to set the time.
You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes,
and 00 seconds.
3
Use the four-way controller (
23
) to select [Number of Shots].
Set the number of shots to be taken.
Press the four-way controller (45) and use the four-way controller
(23) to select the number of shots to be taken.
You can select between 1 and 999 shots.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval].
Set the time when the first picture is taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Now] or [Set Time].
Interval Shooting
• Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to C (Movie), or Z (Night Scene HDR) of
H (Scene) mode
- when the shutter speed is set to h
- when Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set
• When Interval Shooting is set, Multi-exposure is not available.
Now Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more pictures.
Set
Time
Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller (3) to
select [Start Time], use the four-way controller (45) to select the
time, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the start time.
Interval Shooting
MENU
Start Shooting
Interval
Number of Shots
Start Interval
002images
Now
Start Time
Cancel OK
OK
00 00 00
:
'"
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 151 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
152
Shooting Functions
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.
6
Press the shutter release button
halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears when the
subject is in focus.
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in
Step 2.
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal
Capture mode.
• The camera cannot be operated during Interval Shooting. To cancel the
Interval Shooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the
shutter release button and the 3 button to display the exit confirmation
screen, and then use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exit] and press
the 4 button. You can also exit the Interval Shooting by turning the main
switch off or turning the mode dial.
• 9 (Single Frame Shooting) is selected regardless of the current drive mode
setting.
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l (Single mode)
or if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing
cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.
• Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review,
they cannot be enlarged or deleted.
• The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].
• Interval Shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more
available space.
• If the Auto Power Off function (p.281) turns the camera off during Interval
Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time
approaches.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when using
the Interval Shooting over a long period of time. (p.50)
Interval Shooting
Exit
MENU
Standby
Remaining Shots 100images
Interval
00 00 00
:
'
"
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 152 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
153
Shooting Functions
4
You can create a composite picture by taking multiple frames.
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots].
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select the number of
shots.
Select from 2 to 9 shots.
4
Press the 4 button.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV
Adjustment] and use the four-way controller (45) to
select O or P.
When set to O(On), the exposure is adjusted automatically according to
the number of shots.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Multi-exposure
• Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to C (Movie), or Z (Night Scene HDR) of
H (Scene) mode
- when Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set
• When Multi-exposure is set, the following functions are not available.
-
Exposure Bracketing or Interval Shooting (The function selected last is used)
- Distortion Correction or Lateral Chromatic Aberration Adjustment
MENU
OK
2
OK
Multi-exposure
Cancel
Start Shooting
Number of Shots
Auto EV Adjustment
times
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 153 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
154
Shooting Functions
4
7
Take the picture.
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the
shutter release button is pressed. Press the K/i button during
Instant Review to discard pictures taken up to that point and take pictures
again from the first frame.
The pictures are saved when the set number of shots is taken, and then
the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.
• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the pictures
that have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is ended.
- when the Q button, 3 button, four-way controller (234) or M
button is pressed
- when the mode dial is turned
- when Exposure Bracketing is set
• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent
composite image of the pictures taken is displayed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 154 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
155
Shooting Functions
4
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters
You can apply a filter when taking pictures.
The following filters can be selected.
Filter Name Effect Parameter
Toy Camera
For taking pictures that look as
if taken with a toy camera.
Shading Level: +1 to +3
Blur: +1 to +3
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow
Retro
For taking pictures with the
look of old photos.
Toning: -3 to +3
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick
High Contrast
For taking pictures with high
contrasts.
+1 to +5
Extract Color
For extracting two specific
colors and making the rest of
the image black and white.
Extracted Color 1: Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/
Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 1:
-2 to +2
Extracted Color 2: Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/
Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2:
-2 to +2
Soft
*1
For taking pictures with a soft
focus throughout the image.
Soft Focus: +1 to +3
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Starburst
*1
For taking pictures of night
scenes or lights reflected on
water with a special sparkling
look by adding extra glitter to
the highlights.
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow
Crystal/Heart/Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/
Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
Fish-eye
*1
For taking pictures that look as
if taken with a fish-eye lens.
Weak/Medium/Strong
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 155 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
156
Shooting Functions
4
*1 Not available when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).
*2 Available only when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
Custom
Filter
*1
Customize and save a filter to
your own preferences.
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/
Blue/Yellow
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/
Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
Color
*2
For taking pictures with the
selected color filter. Choose
from 18 filters (6 colors ×3
tones).
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Medium/
Dark
• Digital Filter is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene)
mode
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available
- Continuous Shooting, Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure
- HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)
Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.
Filter Name Effect Parameter
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 156 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
157
Shooting Functions
4
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [Digital Filter]
and press the 4 button.
The screen for selecting a filter appears.
After the power is turned on, the last
image taken is displayed in the
background.
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a filter.
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the parameter and
the four-way controller (45) to
adjust the parameter’s value.
Available operations
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
mc button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the filter effect applied. (Not available
when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).)
M button Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
Digital Filter
Not use any filters
OFF
OFF
Starburst
Cancel Check OK
OK
MENU
INFO
OFF
OFF
Shape
MENU
INFO
Cancel Check OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 157 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
158
Shooting Functions
4
• You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.87).
• Set in [Movie] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu when the capture mode is set to
C (Movie). (p.165)
• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 3 to finish shooting with digital filter.
• You can also apply digital filter effects to JPEG/RAW images after shooting
them in Playback mode. (p.253)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 158 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
159
Shooting Functions
4
Shooting with Live View
You can shoot a picture while displaying the real-time image on the
monitor.
• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightness
of the subject is low or high.
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image
may flicker.
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become
stable before shooting.
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When Live View is ended
after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be restarted by pressing the U
button.
• If you continue shooting with Live View for a prolonged period, the internal
temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It
is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To prevent
the image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool
down while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l (temperature
warning) will appear on the monitor and Live View may not be available.
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as in
direct sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.
• If Live View is used even after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View
may end before 5 minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is available
even if Live View is ended.
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur
in the Live View image and/or captured image.
• During Live View, nothing is displayed in the viewfinder.
• Holding the camera by hand and shooting while viewing the monitor may
cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.
• Live View is not displayed when data is being saved to an SD Memory Card.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 159 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
160
Shooting Functions
4
You can set the display and autofocus method for Live View.
1
Select [Live View] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Live View] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select an autofocus
method.
3
Press the 4 button.
Setting Live View
I
Face Detection
AF
Gives autofocus priority to detected faces and
performs contrast autofocus. A yellow frame
appears for a main face (white frames appear for
other faces), and autofocus and automatic exposure
are performed for the main face. (default setting)
The face detection is not performed when the focus
mode is set to \ (except when in I (Auto
Picture)).
i Contrast AF
Displays Live View and performs autofocus based
on the information obtained from the image sensor.
S
Phase
Difference AF
Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the
AF sensor.
If the shutter release button is pressed halfway
during Live View, the Live View image will disappear
and the autofocus system operates. Once focused,
the Live View image will be displayed again.
MENU
Live View
Info Overlay
Show Grid
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Autofocus Method
Cancel OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 160 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
161
Shooting Functions
4
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Show Grid]
and press the four-way controller (5).
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a grid display type and
press the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), e
(4×4 Grid), f (Golden Section) or g
(Scale).
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Info Overlay],
[Histogram] or [Bright/Dark Area].
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
It takes more time to focus on the subject when using I or i than when
using S. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on the following objects (or
under the following conditions).
- objects with poor contrast
- objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes
- objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as a
water fountain
- objects whose distance from the camera changes
- small objects
- objects appearing in both the foreground and background
- when using a special filter
- objects at the edge of the screen
Live View
MENU
Info Overlay
Show Grid
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Autofocus Method
Cancel OK
OK
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 161 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
162
Shooting Functions
4
1
Select a Capture mode.
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C.
2
Press the U button.
The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.
Press the U button again to exit Live View.
Taking Still Pictures
1 Capture Mode 7 Number of shots using Multi-
exposure/Cross Processing
2 Flash Mode
3 Drive Mode 8 Battery level
4 White Balance 9 Temperature warning
5 Custom Image 10 Contrast AF frame
6 Multi-exposure/Interval
Shooting/Digital Filter/HDR
Capture
11 Phase Difference AF frame/AF
point
[
1234
]
+1.0
+1.0
2000 F2.8 3200
P
P
1122+3-3
ISO
[
37
]
2000 F2.8 400
P
P
ISO
SHIFT
SHIFT
12345678
12
13
17161514 18 19 20 21
11
9
10
Live View display
(All of the indicators are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 162 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
163
Shooting Functions
4
* Indicator 11 (Phase Difference AF frame) is displayed in white during
Live View. When the subject is in focus, a green square frame is
displayed instead. It turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not
displayed when the focus mode is set to \.
* When 15, 16, and 18 can be changed, 5 appears next to the set value.
* Indicators 20 and 21 are displayed when [Autofocus Method] is set to
I and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition
frames are displayed on the monitor.)
Available operations
3
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
12 EV Compensation 18 Sensitivity
13 Histogram 19
Remaining image storage capacity
14 AE Lock 20 Main face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)
15 Shutter speed
16 Aperture value 21 Face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)
17 EV bar
4 button When the focusing area is set to S (Select) and
[Autofocus Method] is set to i or S, press this button
to disable direct key operation of the four-way controller
(2345) and enable changing the AF point.
Four-way
controller
(2345)
Changes the AF point when the AF point can be changed.
Press the 4 button to return AF point to the center of the
AF frame.
Press and hold
4 button
Disables changing the AF point and enables direct key
operation of the four-way controller (2345).
M button
Enlarges the image to 2, 4, or 6 times (when the focus mode is
set to
\
, enlarges the image to 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 times). Use
the four-way controller (
2345
) to move the display area,
and press the
|
button to return the display area to the center.
(Available only when [Green Button] is assigned to the
|
button in [Green Button] of the [
A
Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.197).)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 163 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
164
Shooting Functions
4
• When [AF Mode] is set to k and [Autofocus Method] is set to I or i,
the camera focuses on the center of the screen when autofocus starts and
then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus.
• Images captured in magnified display are recorded at normal size.
• If [Optical Preview] or [Digital Preview] is assigned to the | button in [Green
Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder when you press the | button. (p.137)
The status screen and control panel cannot be displayed during Live View. To
change the settings, press the 3 button and change them in each menu.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 164 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
165
Shooting Functions
4
Recording Movies
You can record movies using Live View.
You can record movies with a frame rate (number of frames shot per
second) at 25 frames per second (fps), monaural audio, and the file format
set to AVI.
1
Select [Movie] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Movie] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select the number of
recorded pixels, and press the
4 button.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality Level]
and press the four-way controller (5).
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the quality
level and press the 4 button.
Select from C (Best; default setting), D (Better) and E (Good).
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount of
recordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.
Changing the Movie Settings
Recorded Pixels Pixels Aspect Ratio
b (default setting) 1280×720 16:9
c 640×480 4:3
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Sound
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
1280x720
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
00:00'00"
Movie Aperture Control
Fixed
Shake Reduction
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 165 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
166
Shooting Functions
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound] and
press the four-way controller (5).
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select g or Z and
press the 4 button.
7
Change the [Cross Processing] and [Digital Filter] settings
as necessary.
For details, refer to p.216 for Cross Processing and p.155 for Digital
Filter.
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie
Aperture Control] and press the four-way controller (5).
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Fixed] or
[Auto] and press the 4 button.
10
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the four-way controller (5).
11
Use the four-way controller (23) to select k or l
and press the 4 button.
12
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to record a movie.
g Records sound. (default setting)
Z Does not record sound.
Fixed
The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie
recording starts. (default setting)
Auto
The aperture is controlled automatically. (The aperture value is
fixed while recording a movie even if [Auto] is selected.)
k Uses Shake Reduction.
l Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 166 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
167
Shooting Functions
4
1
Set the mode dial to C.
Live View for movie recording is
displayed.
Available operations
s
Recording Movies
E-dial Changes the aperture value when [Movie Aperture
Control] is set to [Fixed]. (default setting)
| button Resets the aperture value when [Green Button] is
assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the
[A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
Displays the setting screen when [Custom Image],
[Digital Filter] or [Cross Processing] is assigned to
the | button. (p.197)
mc button + e-dial Adjusts the EV compensation (±2 EV).
4 button
When the focusing area is set to
S
(Select) and
[Autofocus Method] is set to
i
or
S
, press this
button to disable direct key operation of the four-way
controller (
2345
) and enable changing the AF point.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Changes the AF point when the AF point can be
changed.
Press the 4 button to return AF point to the center
of the AF frame.
00
:
30'00"F2.8
1+2-2 1
+1.5
+1.5
HD
HD
Sound
Recordable Time
Shake Reduction
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 167 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
168
Shooting Functions
4
2
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
Recording of the movie starts.
4
Press the shutter release button again.
Recording stops.
Press and hold 4
button
Disables changing the AF point and enables direct
key operation of the four-way controller (
2345
).
M button Enlarges the image to 2, 4, or 6 times (when the
focus mode is set to \, enlarges the image to 2, 4,
6, 8, or 10 times). Use the four-way controller
(2345) to move the display area.
• When [Sound] is set to g (On), the camera operation sounds are also
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do
not operate the camera while recording.
• When recording a movie, regardless of the AF mode setting, recording starts
when the shutter release button is pressed fully even if the subject is not in
focus.
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.
• The flash is not available.
• When recording movies using image processing, such as Digital Filter, some
frames may be omitted from the recorded movie.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie
recording, the recording may be terminated to protect the camera circuitry.
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.
• Live View image in C mode is displayed according to the [Live View] setting
(p.160) made in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. However, the histogram and
Bright/Dark Area warning are not displayed during movie recording.
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter
kit K-AC109 (optional) is recommended. (p.50)
• You can also use the optional remote control to record a movie. (p.147)
• EV compensation is also available during movie recording.
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 168 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
169
Shooting Functions
4
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the same
manner as saved images.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to
play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
3
Press the four-way controller
(2).
Movie playback starts.
Available operations
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.
Playing Back Movies
Four-way controller (2) Pauses/Resumes playback.
E-dial Volume control (6 levels)
Four-way controller (5) Forwards a frame (during pause).
Press and hold four-way
controller (5)
Fast-forwards playback while pressed.
Four-way controller (4) Reverses playback./
Reverses a frame (during pause).
Press and hold four-way
controller (4)
Fast-reverses playback while pressed.
Four-way controller (3) Stops playback./
Displays the playback mode palette (when
stopped). (p.220)
M button Saves the displayed image as a JPEG file.
You can use the optional AV cable I-AVC7 to play back recorded movies on a
TV screen or other AV devices. (p.242)
Movie 10
min
00
sec
100-0001
100-0001
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 169 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
170
Shooting Functions
4
You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still
picture.
1
Press the four-way controller (2)
in Step 3 on p.169 to pause the
movie, and display the frame to
save as a still picture.
2
Press the M button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The captured image is saved as a new
image.
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie
Movie 10
min
00
sec
90/1800
90/1800
INFO
Cancel
Save as
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 170 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
171
Shooting Functions
4
Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to
play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [ (Movie
Editing) and press the 4 button.
The movie editing screen appears.
5
Select point(s) where you want to
divide the movie.
Up to four points can be selected.
Available operations
Editing Movies
Four-way controller (2)
Plays back/Pauses a movie.
Four-way controller (5)
Moves forward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the next dividing point (during
playback).
Four-way controller (4)
Moves backward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the previous dividing point
(during playback).
E-dial Volume control (6 levels)
| button
Confirms/cancels a dividing point.
00min00sec
10min00sec
MENU
Exit OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 171 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
172
Shooting Functions
4
6
Press the K/i button to delete unwanted segments.
The screen to select segment(s) to delete
is displayed.
Available operations
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The movie is divided at the specified
points and the unwanted segments are
deleted from it. And then the divided
movie is saved as separate files and
displayed on the screen.
Four-way controller (45)
Moves the selection frame.
4 button
Confirms/cancels a selection of a segment
to delete.
3 button
Exits the screen to select segments to
delete.
Specify the dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of the
movie. When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them in
reverse order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). Dividing point(s)
cannot be added or canceled while specifying dividing point(s).
Exit
Select segments for deletion
00min02sec
10min00sec
OK
MENU
00min00sec
10min00sec
MENU
Exit OK
OK
Cancel
Save as
Saves divided movie
as separate files
MENU
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 172 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
5 Using the Flash
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of the
W and describes how to take pictures with an external
flash.
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode
..............................................................................174
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in
Flash ....................................................................178
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash .......179
Using an External Flash (Optional) ..................180
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 173 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
174
Using the Flash
5
Flash Characteristics in Each
Exposure Mode
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blur
effect.
• Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking
a flash photograph.
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient
brightness.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens is used.
• You can set the desired aperture value to take a flash photograph when
you want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to a
slow shutter speed (p.68) that reduces camera shake. The slowest
shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.
You can use Slow-speed Sync in . (Night Scene Portrait) of Picture
mode or b (Shutter Priority) mode when shooting portraits with the sunset
in the background. Both the portrait and the background are captured
beautifully.
Using the Flash in b (Shutter Priority) Mode
Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode
Using the Slow-speed Sync
• Slow-speed Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function
or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera
shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 174 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
175
Using the Flash
5
1
Set the mode dial to b.
2
Use the e-dial to set the shutter speed.
The background is not properly exposed if the aperture value is blinking
when the shutter speed is set. Adjust the shutter speed so that the
aperture value does not blink.
3
Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
4
Take a picture.
1
Set the mode dial to e, K or c.
2
Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
4
Select G or H and press the 4 button.
The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the
background.
5
Take a picture.
Using b Mode
Using e/K/c Mode
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 175 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
176
Using the Flash
5
1
Set the mode dial to a.
2
Set the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a
proper exposure.
Set 1/180 sec. shutter speed or slower.
3
Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
In a (Manual) mode, you can raise the built-in flash at any time prior to
shooting.
4
Take a picture.
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects
depending on when the flash is discharged.
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync,
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing light behind it.
Using a Mode
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync
Slow-speed Sync
(Leading Curtain Sync)
Trailing Curtain Sync
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 176 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
177
Using the Flash
5
1
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, c or a.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
3
Select I or k and press the 4 button.
4
Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
5
Take a picture.
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction
function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid
camera shake.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 177 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
178
Using the Flash
5
Distance and Aperture when Using
the Built-in Flash
Relationships between the guide number, aperture and distance must be
considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.
*1 This can be used when [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu is set
to [On].
The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 *
* The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.
Example)
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the aperture value is F4.0
L1 = 16 ÷ 4.0 = approx. 4 (m)
L2 = 4 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.8 (m)
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.8 m to 4 m.
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the distance
is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes
vignetting in the picture corners, light is distributed unevenly and a picture
may be overexposed.
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance
Example)
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the shooting distance is 5 m, the
aperture value is:
F = 16 ÷ 5 = 3.2
If the resulting number (3.2, in the above example) is not available as a
lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the above
example) is generally used.
Sensitivity
Built-in Flash
Guide Number
Sensitivity
Built-in Flash
Guide Number
ISO 100 *1 Approx. 12 ISO 3200 Approx. 64
ISO 200 Approx. 16 ISO 6400 Approx. 96
ISO 400 Approx. 24 ISO 12800 *1 Approx. 128
ISO 800 Approx. 32 ISO 25600 *1 Approx. 192
ISO 1600 Approx. 48
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 178 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
179
Using the Flash
5
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in
Flash
Depending on the lens used with the W, even if a lens without a hood
is attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be available or may be
limited due to vignetting.
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without
problems.
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.
Unavailable due to vignetting
Available depending on other factors
Lens Name
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)
DA12-24mm F4ED AL
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)
FA
300mm F2.8ED (IF)
FA
600mm F4ED (IF)
FA
250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)
Lens Name Restrictions
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less
than 20 mm.
DA16-45mm F4ED AL
When the focal length is less than 28 mm or
when the focal length is 28 mm and the
shooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting
may occur.
DA
16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when
the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting
distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may occur.
DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM
When the focal length is less than 24 mm or
when the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less
than 35 mm.
FA
28-70mm F2.8AL
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is 28
mm and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8 Built-in flash always discharges fully.
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8 Built-in flash always discharges fully.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 179 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
180
Using the Flash
5
Using an External Flash (Optional)
Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash
mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for
details.
(z: Available #: Restricted × : Not available)
*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ
unit and the built-in flash is required.
Flash
Camera Function
Built-in
Flash
AF540FGZ
AF360FGZ
AF200FG
AF160FC
Red-eye reduction flash zz z
Auto flash discharge zz z
After the flash is charged, the camera
automatically switches to the flash sync speed.
zz z
Aperture value is automatically set in e
mode and b mode.
zz z
P-TTL auto flash z
*1
z
*1
z
*1
Slow-speed Sync zz z
Flash exposure compensation zz z
AF assist light of external flash × z ×
Trailing Curtain Sync
*2
zz ×
Contrast-control-sync flash mode #
*3
z #
*4
Slave flash × z ×
High-speed flash sync × z ×
Wireless flash #
*4
z
*5
×
Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 180 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
181
Using the Flash
5
You can use [P-TTL Auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash and
confirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it is
backlit, etc.) using the camera 16-segment metering sensor. The flash
output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained
from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more accurate
exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
2
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
3
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL auto].
4
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then
take a picture.
Using P-TTL Auto Mode
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT
size to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital
Camera, the difference in focal length between a 35 mm camera and
the W is automatically calculated based on the difference in angle
of view and is displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D FA,
FA J, FA or F lens).
The conversion indicator appears and the FORMAT size indicator
disappears when the exposure metering timer of the
W
is on (it
returns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is turned off).
* Using wide-angle panel
Lens Focal Length
85mm
/77mm
50mm 35mm
28mm
/24mm
20mm 18 mm
Exposure metering
timer Off
85mm 70mm 50mm 35mm 28mm 24mm
*
Exposure metering
timer On
58mm 48mm 34mm 24mm 19mm 16mm
*
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 181 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
182
Using the Flash
5
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a
picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 second.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.
2
Set the mode dial to b or a.
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
4
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (high-speed
flash sync).
5
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then
take a picture.
• P-TTL auto is only available with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit.
•The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please refer to
the external flash manual.
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash
mode is set to C or i. Therefore, it may not be suitable for daylight-sync
shooting.
• Never press the K/i button when any external flash unit is attached to
the camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both
at once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.
(p.187).
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode
•The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster
than 1/180 sec.
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the shutter speed is set to h.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 182 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
183
Using the Flash
5
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the
built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL
flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.
First, set the channel for the external flash unit.
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the
shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.
Using Flash in Wireless Mode
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use
high-speed flash sync in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in
combination with the built-in flash.
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the
camera to SLAVE.
Setting the Channel for the External Flash
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash is
displayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the
external flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 183 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
184
Using the Flash
5
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in
combination with the built-in flash.
1
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
Select r and press the 4
button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Using the Built-in Flash in Wireless Mode
When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)) or the lens
aperture is not set to the s position, r cannot be selected.
Flash Mode
Wireless Mode
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
0.0
Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless
mode.
Set in [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
(p.90).
1 On Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (default setting)
2 Off Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.
HSb (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 184 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
185
Using the Flash
5
Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash
Unit
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on
the camera, and place it at the desired location.
2
Set the camera flash to r mode, and press the K/i
button.
3
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take
a picture.
Using a Combination of External Flash Units
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].
2
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place
it at the desired location.
3
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take
a picture.
Wireless Shooting
MASTER
Sets the camera to discharge both the flash directly
connected to the camera and the wireless flash unit.
CONTROL
Sets the camera to discharge the flash directly connected
to the camera as a control flash only, not as the main flash.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off in wireless mode.
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing
high-speed flash sync shooting in wireless mode, set the flash directly
connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 185 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
186
Using the Flash
5
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between
the flash units before the flash is discharged.
Press the shutter release button fully.
È
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays the flash mode of the camera).
2 The wireless remote flash emits a test flash (relays confirmation
of subject).
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).
* The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash one
more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HSb (High-
speed sync) is set.
4 The wireless remote flash discharges.
When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the
camera is set to [MASTER] or [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.184) is set
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.
Red-Eye Reduction
As with the built-in flash, the red-eye reduction function is available
with an external flash. However, this function may not be available on
some flashes or may have restrictions for usage conditions. Refer to
the chart on p.180.
• The red-eye reduction function works by discharging the flash twice
even when only an external flash is used. (p.79)
• If the red-eye reduction function of the built-in flash is used when the
external flash is set as the slave unit or with the wireless function, the
pre-flash for red-eye reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use
the red-eye reduction function when using a slave unit.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 186 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
187
Using the Flash
5
When using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not have a
wireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe
Adapter F
G (optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect these
with the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the
tripod screw.
Only a P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in flash.
When combining with the built-in flash
Connecting an External Flash with an
Extension Cord
Trailing Curtain Sync
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync mode, the built-in
flash will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully
charged before shooting.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 187 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
188
Using the Flash
5
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with
the built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or
AF200FG units as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external
flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter
F with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).
Refer to the manual of the external flash for details.
When combining two or more external flashes
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension
Cords
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 188 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
189
Using the Flash
5
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of
light discharged from multiple units.
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.
Refer to p.187.
2
Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrast-
control-sync mode.
3
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, c or a.
4
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are
fully charged and then take a picture.
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync mode
is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master
unit) : 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the
built-in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-
in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 189 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Memo
190
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 190 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
6 Shooting Settings
This chapter describes how to set the save format for
pictures taken and other settings.
Setting a File Format ..........................................192
Setting the Green Button Function ..................197
Setting the White Balance..................................200
Correcting Images ..............................................207
Setting the Image Finishing Tone .....................213
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 191 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
192
Shooting Settings
6
Setting a File Format
You can select the number of recorded pixels from E, J, P and i.
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file
size. The file size will also vary according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.
The default setting is E.
The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the
quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of
other factors.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [JPEG
Recorded Pixels] and press the
4 button.
The [JPEG Recorded Pixels] screen
appears.
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels
Recorded Pixels Pixels Paper Size
E 4288×2848 14"×17" / A2 paper
J
3936×2624 10"×12" / A3 paper
P
3072×2048 8"×10" / A4 paper
i
1728×1152 5"×7" / A5 paper
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
JPEG Recorded Pixels
4288x2848
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 192 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
193
Shooting Settings
6
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select the number of
recorded pixels.
When the number of recorded pixels is
changed, the number of recordable
images appears at the top right of the
screen.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The file size will
also vary according to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default
setting is C (Best).
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
Setting the JPEG Quality Level
C Best
Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.
D Better
E Good Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.
JPEG Recorded Pixels
4288x2848
MENU
10M 6M 2M12M
128
Cancel OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 193 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
194
Shooting Settings
6
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [JPEG
Quality] and press the 4
button.
The [JPEG Quality] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a quality level.
When the quality level is changed, the
number of recordable images at that
quality level appears at the top right of the
screen.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
JPEG Quality
OFF
OFF
MENU
128
OK
OK
JPEG Quality
Cancel
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 194 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
195
Shooting Settings
6
You can set the format of image files.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [File Format]
and press the 4 button.
The [File Format] screen appears.
Setting the File Format
JPEG
Captures images in JPEG format (default setting).
You can change the number of recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded
Pixels], and the image quality level in [JPEG Quality].
RAW
RAW format is a CMOS sensor output format saved without processing.
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not
applied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original
information. When you perform the development process by using RAW
Development function (p.259), or using the provided software (PENTAX
Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to a computer, you
can create JPEG images with these effects.
RAW+
Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | button, you can press
the | button to temporarily change the file format and save an image in
both file formats. (p.198)
When Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set, the file format is
fixed to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To change the file format, turn these
functions off.
12M
[
37
]
JPEG
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AF.A
File Format
OFF
OFF
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 195 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
196
Shooting Settings
6
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a file format.
When the file format is changed, the
number of recordable images appears at
the top right of the screen.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW
File Format] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
(p.88) when capturing images in RAW format.
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
• The file format is fixed to [JPEG] when the capture mode is set to n (Stage
Lighting), l (Night Snap) or Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.
Setting the RAW File Format
PEF PENTAX’s original RAW file format (default setting)
DNG
General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by Adobe
Systems
MENU
128
OK
JPEG
RAW+
RAW
OK
File Format
Cancel
MENU
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
Memory
Color Space
RAW File Format
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length 35mm
sRGB
PEF
AF1
12
3
4
Cancel OK
OK
PEF
DNG
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 196 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
197
Shooting Settings
6
Setting the Green Button Function
You can assign one of the following functions to the | button and access
the function by simply pressing the button while shooting.
1
Select [Green Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Green Button] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Green Button Resets the values being adjusted. (default setting)
Custom Image Sets the Custom Image settings. (p.213)
Optical Preview Displays the Optical Preview. (p.139)
Digital Preview Displays the Digital Preview. (p.140)
Digital Filter Sets the Digital Filter. (p.155)
Cross Processing Sets the Cross Processing. (p.216)
One Push File
Format
Temporarily changes the file format. Simultaneously saves
an image in both JPEG and RAW format, regardless of the
[File Format] setting. You can set whether to apply the
setting to only one image or not, and select the file format
when the | button is pressed. (p.198)
MENU
P LINE
P SHIFT
Green Button
Action in M Mode
Green Button
E-dial in Program
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 197 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
198
Shooting Settings
6
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a function to
assign to the | button, and
press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | button, specify the
function settings.
1
Select [One Push File Format] in Step 3 of “Setting the
Green Button Function”.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Cancel after 1
shot].
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
Setting the One Push File Format
O
The recording format returns to the original file format after a
picture is taken. (default setting)
P
The setting is canceled when the following operations are
performed.
-the | button is pressed again
-the Q button or 3 button is pressed
- the main switch is turned off
- the mode dial is turned
Green Button
MENU
Cancel OK
OK
Custom Image
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
Green Button
Cross Processing
One Push File Format
RAW
Digital Filter
Green Button
Cancel after 1 shot
One Push File Format
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
MENU
RAW
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 198 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
199
Shooting Settings
6
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format
when the | button is pressed.
5
Press the four-way controller
(5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select a file
format when the | button is
pressed.
6
Press the 4 button.
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Green Button
Cancel after 1 shot
One Push File Format
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW
MENU
Cancel OK
OK
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 199 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
200
Shooting Settings
6
Setting the White Balance
White balance is a function for adjusting the color of an image so that white
objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied with the
color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F (Auto), or
to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.
*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise
colors.
*2 CTE= Color Temperature Enhancement
Item Settings
Color
Temperature
*1
F
Auto
Automatically adjusts the white balance.
(default setting)
Approx. 4,000
to 8,000K
G
Daylight For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K
H
Shade
For use when taking pictures in the
shade. It reduces the bluish color tones
in a picture.
Approx. 8,000K
^
Cloudy
For use when taking pictures on cloudy
days.
Approx. 6,000K
J
Fluorescent
Light
For use when taking pictures under
fluorescent lighting. Select the type of
fluorescent light.
D Fluorescent Light Daylight Color
N Fluorescent Light Daylight White
W Fluorescent Light Cool White
L Fluorescent Light Warm White
Approx. 6,500K
Approx. 5,000K
Approx. 4,200K
Approx. 3,000K
I
Tungsten
Light
For use when taking pictures under light
bulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces
the reddish color tones in a picture.
Approx. 2,850K
L
Flash
For use when taking pictures using the
built-in flash.
Approx. 5,400K
CTE
*2
Use this to keep and strengthen the
color tone of the light source in the
image.
–
K
Manual
Use this to manually adjust the white
balance according to the lighting so that
white objects appear as a natural white.
–
White balance is fixed to F when the capture mode is set to Picture mode
or H (Scene) mode, or when Cross Processing is set.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 200 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
201
Shooting Settings
6
1
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, c, or a.
2
Press the four-way controller (4) in Capture mode.
The [White Balance] screen appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.
3
Press the four-way controller
(23) to select the white balance.
Available operations
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
mc button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the setting applied.
M button Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
Because the light source changes when a flash discharges, you can set the
white balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],
[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [12. WB When Using Flash] of the [A Custom
Setting 2] menu (p.89).
White Balance
MENU
CTE
INFO
Auto
Cancel Check OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 201 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
202
Shooting Settings
6
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when taking
pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store delicate shades
that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance preset values provided
in the camera. This provides the optimum white balance for your surroundings.
1
Select K in Step 3 on p.201 and
press the four-way controller
(5).
Adjusting the White Balance Manually
Color Temperature
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises, and
towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature describes
this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature (K: Kelvin).
This camera is capable of setting the white balance to enable taking
pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting conditions.
2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 12000
[
K
]
Candle flame
Oil lamp
Tungsten light
Halogen light bulb
White (Fluorescent light)
Daylight
Cloudy
Shade
Clear sky
Daylight (Fluorescent light)
Neutral white (Fluorescent light)
Flash
Red tint Blue tint
MENU
CTE
Cancel Check OK
OK
White Balance
Manual
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 202 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
203
Shooting Settings
6
2
Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display
a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white
area as the subject.
3
Press the shutter release button fully.
Set the focus mode lever to \ when the shutter cannot be released.
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.
4
Use the e-dial to select the entire
screen or spot area for the
measuring range.
5
When a spot area is selected, use
the four-way controller (2345)
to move the frame to the position
you want to measure.
6
Press the 4 button.
The white balance fine-tuning screen
appears when measuring is completed.
Adjust the white balance as necessary.
(p.204)
7
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
MENU
Cancel OK
OK
OK
MENU
SHUTTER
GG
BBA
A
A
MM
±0 ±0
±0
INFO
Cancel Check
Manual
Adjust
OK
White Balance
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 203 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
204
Shooting Settings
6
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
You can fine-tune the white balance setting.
1
Perform the desired setting in Step 3 on p.201.
2
Press the four-way controller (5).
The fine-tuning screen appears.
3
Fine-tune the white balance.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.
Available operations
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust
the white balance.
• The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears
when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed to
remeasure the white balance.
• If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance
may not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct amount level
before adjusting the white balance.
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot be
measured. Adjust the white balance in any capture mode other than C
before recording a movie.
Fine-Tuning the White Balance
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between
green (G) and magenta (M).
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between
blue (B) and amber (A).
| button Resets the adjustment value. (Available
only when [Green Button] is assigned to |
button in [Green Button] of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.197).)
Shade
MENU
GG
BBA
A
A
MM
G1 ±0
±0
Cancel Check OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 204 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
205
Shooting Settings
6
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
You can select a color space to use.
Set [Color Space] in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu (p.88).
When set to K, the white balance can also be measured by pressing the
shutter release button fully (except while recording a movie).
Setting the Color Space
sRGB
Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)
AdobeRGB
Sets to AdobeRGB color space.
The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as
shown below.
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG
For AdobeRGB: _IGPxxxx.JPG
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number. (p.280)
MENU
35mm
sRGB
PEF
AF1
12
3
4
Cancel OK
OK
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
Memory
Color Space
RAW File Format
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
sRGB
Adobe
RGB
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 205 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
206
Shooting Settings
6
Color Space
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called the
Color Space.
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and
AdobeRGB.
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for
occupational uses such as industrial printing.
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 206 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
207
Shooting Settings
6
Correcting Images
The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted for when
taking pictures.
Adjusts the brightness and reduces the occurrence of overexposed and
underexposed areas.
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of
overexposed areas.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Highlight
Correction] and press the 4 button.
The [Highlight Correction] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select [Off] or [On].
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
Adjusting Brightness
Highlight Correction
MENU
DR
DR
200
200
OK
OK
Highlight Correction
Cancel
Off
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 207 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
208
Shooting Settings
6
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of
underexposed areas.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Shadow
Correction] and press the 4 button.
The [Shadow Correction] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select [Off], [Low], [Medium] or
[High].
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On], the minimum sensitivity is set to
ISO 400. If [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89)
is set to [On], the sensitivity is set to ISO 200.
• [Highlight Correction] is fixed to [On] when the capture mode is set to
n (Stage Lighting) or l (Night Snap) of H (Scene) mode.
Shadow Correction
You can also set Highlight Correction and Shadow Correction in [D-Range
Setting] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu (p.88).
MENU
OK
OK
Shadow Correction
Cancel
Off
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 208 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
209
Shooting Settings
6
Enables capturing images at high dynamic range. Takes three images
(-3EV underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and +3EV
overexposed) to create a single composite image with them.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [HDR
Capture] and press the 4 button.
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select [Off], [Auto], [Standard],
[Strong 1], [Strong 2] or [Strong
3].
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
HDR Capture
• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
- when the shutter speed is set to h
• When HDR Capture is set, the following functions are not available.
- Continuous Shooting, Exposure Bracketing, Interval Shooting or Multi-
exposure
- Flash modes other than a (Flash Off)
- Digital Filter or Cross Processing (The function selected last is used)
• During HDR Capture, multiple images are combined together to create a
single image, so it will take time to save an image.
HDR Capture
MENU
Off
HDR
HDR
AUTO
AUTO
HDR
HDR
OFF
OFF
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
Cancel OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 209 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
210
Shooting Settings
6
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being
saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.
• HDR Capture is fixed to [Auto] and [Auto Align] is set to O (On) when the
capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.
• You can set the [HDR Capture] setting
from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.87). If
you use the menu, you can also set the
[Auto Align] setting.
• When both [Shake Reduction] and [Auto Align] are set to on, be careful of the
following points.
- Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture
does not change while the three images are taken. If there is a great
difference of the composition between three images, [Auto Align] may not
be possible.
- Images taken with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and blur.
Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.
- When the ISO sensitivity is set to AUTO, the sensitivity can be raised more
easily than normal.
- [Auto Align] may not be possible for lenses that have a focal length
exceeding 100 mm.
- When the entire subject is checkered or has a uniform surface, [Auto Align]
may not be possible.
HDR Capture
MENU
Auto Align
HDR Capture
HDR
HDR
AUTO
AUTO
P
Does not use Shake
Reduction regardless of the
Shake Reduction setting.
(default setting)
O
Turns Shake Reduction on or
off according to the Shake
Reduction setting.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 210 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
211
Shooting Settings
6
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to
lens properties.
Distortion
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a
zoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in
the image appear curved.
Lateral chromatic aberration
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which the
magnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengths
of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.
Lens Correction
Pincushion distortion Barrel distortion
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 211 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
212
Shooting Settings
6
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Distortion
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] and press the 4
button.
The [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select [Off] or [On].
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA lenses
(p.312). [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] cannot be
selected when an incompatible lens is attached.
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as a
close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and the
lens.
• The shooting speed for continuous shooting may be slower when the Lens
Correction function is activated.
• The effects of the Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in some
cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.
• When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you
can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.262)
• You can also set [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] in [Lens
Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu (p.88).
MENU
OK
OK
Distortion Correction
Cancel
Off
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 212 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
213
Shooting Settings
6
Setting the Image Finishing Tone
You can set the image finishing tone before shooting when the capture
mode is set to e (Program), K (Sensitivity Priority), b (Shutter Priority),
c (Aperture Priority) or a (Manual).
Select from the following nine modes for the image finishing tone: Bright
(default setting), Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film and Monochrome. You can adjust the following
parameters for Image Tone.
Setting Custom Image
Parameter Settings Setting Values
Saturation
Sets the color saturation.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
–4 to +4
Hue
Sets the color.
• Not available when [Bleach Bypass],
[Reversal Film] or [Monochrome] is
selected.
–4 to +4
High/Low Key
Adj
Changes the brightness of the image.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is
selected.
–4 to +4
Contrast
Sets the image contrast.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is
selected.
–4 to +4
Sharpness
Sets the sharpness of the image outlines.
You can switch to [Fine Sharpness] which
makes image outlines even thinner and
sharper. Not available when the capture
mode is set to
C
(Movie).
–4 to +4
Filter Effect
Changes the contrast to appear as if a B&W
color filter was used. Set the filter color.
• Available only when [Monochrome] is
selected.
None/Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
Infrared Filter
Toning
Sets a color tone for [Bleach Bypass].
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment
(- direction) and warm tone adjustment
(+ direction) for [Monochrome].
• Available only when [Bleach Bypass] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
Bleach Bypass: Off/
Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/
Magenta/Purple/Blue/
Cyan
Monochrome:
–4 to
+4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 213 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
214
Shooting Settings
6
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
2
Use the four way controller (2345) to select [Custom
Image] and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a custom image appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image finishing tone.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose a parameter you want
to change.
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.
The background image changes according to the settings.
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.
When Cross Processing is set, the image finishing tone is fixed to [Bright] and
the parameters cannot be changed.
MENU
R
Y
G
C
B
M
R
Y
G
C
B
M
F
F
INFO
OK
OK
Bright
Bright
Cancel Check
Portrait
Portrait
Check
MENU
R
Y
B
M
R
Y
B
M
F
F
INFO
CC
GG
Cancel OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 214 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
215
Shooting Settings
6
Available operations
6
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
E-dial Switches between [Sharpness] and [Fine Sharpness].
When set to [Fine Sharpness], image outlines can be
captured with more detail.
| button Resets the set value. (Available only when [Green
Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of
the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.197).)
mc button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image
with the setting applied.
M button Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button. (Not available during Live View.)
You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 215 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
216
Shooting Settings
6
Cross processing is the procedure of deliberately processing a film in the
wrong type of chemicals to create an image with different colors and
contrast. This camera features digital cross processing, which is done
internally.
1
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
Set in [Movie] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu when the capture mode is
set to C (Movie). (p.165)
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Cross
Processing] and press the 4 button.
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [Off], [Preset
1-3], [Random] or [Favorite 1-3].
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
Setting Cross Processing
• Cross Processing is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene)
mode
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
• When Cross Processing is set, the following functions are not available.
- Multi-exposure
- HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)
- Changing the settings of White Balance and Custom Image
Set the mode dial to C (Movie) when using Cross Processing for movies.
MENU
Cross Processing
Off
OFF
OFF
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
3
3
2
2
Cancel OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 216 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
217
Shooting Settings
6
The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If you
are able to take a cross processed image that you like, you can save the
Cross Processing settings used in that image. A total of 3 Cross
Processing settings can be saved for still pictures and movies.
1
Select [Cross Processing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save Settings] and
press the four-way controller
(5).
The camera will search for cross
processed images starting from the most
recent image taken. (An hourglass icon is
displayed while searching.) When a cross
processed image is found, the screen to save the settings appears.
If there are no cross processed images, the message [No cross
processed image] appears.
3
Use the e-dial to select a cross
processed image.
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.87).
Saving the Cross Processing Setting of a Captured Image
To save Cross Processing setting for movies, set from [Movie] in the [A Rec.
Mode 3] menu with the mode dial set to C (Movie).
Cross Processing
Cross Processing
MENU
Save Settings
OFF
OFF
100-0001
100-0001
1
1
MENU
Save as Favorite 3
Save as Favorite 2
Save as Favorite 1
Saves this image's Cross
Saves this image's Cross
Processing settings
Processing settings
Cancel OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 217 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
218
Shooting Settings
6
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as
Favorite 1], [Save as Favorite 2] or [Save as Favorite 3] and
press the 4 button.
The settings for the selected image are saved to [Favorite 1 - 3].
5
Press the 3 button twice to finish saving.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 218 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
7 Playback Functions
This chapter describes how to use the various playback
functions in Playback mode.
Playback Functions Operation .........................220
Setting the Playback Display Method ..............222
Enlarging Images ...............................................223
Displaying Multiple Images ...............................224
Playing Back Images Continuously .................232
Rotating Images .................................................235
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................236
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ......240
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .........242
Exchanging Image Data with Other Devices ...244
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 219 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
220
Playback Functions
7
Playback Functions Operation
Make settings related to playing back images in the playback mode palette
or [Q Playback] menu.
Press the four-way controller (3) in
Playback mode to display the playback
mode palette.
You can display the playback mode palette
even when a movie is paused.
For details on how to use the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.37).
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items
Item Function Page
s Image Rotation
*1
Rotates images. p.235
D Digital Filter
*1
Changes the color tone of images, adds
softening and slimming effects, or adjusts
the brightness.
p.253
n Resize
*1 *2
Changes the number of recorded pixels and
quality level of the captured image and
saves it as a new file.
p.250
o Cropping
*1
Cuts out only the desired area of the picture
and saves it as a new image.
p.251
Z Protect
Protects images from being accidentally erased.
p.240
u Slideshow Plays back the images one after another. p.233
Exit
Image Rotation
Rotates captured images.
MENU
Useful for image playback on
TV and other display devices
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 220 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
221
Playback Functions
7
*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.
*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.
*3 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.
You can perform the following settings in the
[Q Playback ] menu.
Press the 3 button in Playback mode to
display the [Q Playback 1] menu.
p Index
Joins a number of images together and
creates a new image with them.
p.229
h
RAW Development
*1
Converts RAW images to JPEG format. p.259
[ Movie Editing
*3
Divides a movie and extracts segments from it.
p.171
r DPOF
*1 *2
Sets the DPOF settings. p.285
g Image Comparison
*1
Displays two images side-by-side. p.228
i IrSimple
Sends or receives image data via infrared
transmission.
p.244
j Dueling Images
Images are squared off with those of other
W cameras in this dueling game.
p.246
Playback Menu Setting Items
Menu Item Function Page
Q1
Slideshow
Plays back the images one after another.
You can set how images will be displayed
in the slideshow.
p.232
Quick Zoom
Sets the initial magnification when
enlarging images.
p.222Bright/Dark Area
Sets whether or not to display the Bright/
Dark Area warning during playback.
Auto Image Rotation
Sets whether to rotate images shot with the
camera held vertically when playing back.
IrSimple
Sets infrared transmission settings and sends
or receives data via infrared transmission.
p.244
Delete All Images You can delete all saved images at once. p.239
Item Function Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 221 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
222
Playback Functions
7
Setting the Playback Display Method
You can set the initial magnification when enlarging images, whether to
display the Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to automatically rotate
images that are shot with the camera held vertically in Playback mode.
1
Select [Quick Zoom] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the magnification and
press the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],
[×4], [×8] or [×16].
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Bright/Dark Area], and
use the four-way controller (45)
to select O or P.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Image
Rotation], and use the four-way controller (45) to select
O or P.
5
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
O
During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on the
rotation information when [18. Saving Rotation Info] in the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu (p.90) is set to [On]. (default setting)
P The image is not automatically rotated during playback.
MENU
1
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Delete All Images
Cancel OK
OK
X2
X4
X8
X16
Off
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Delete All Images
Exit
MENU
Off
1
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 222 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
223
Playback Functions
7
Enlarging Images
Images can be magnified up to 16 times in Playback mode.
1
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image in Playback
mode.
2
Turn the e-dial to the right
(toward y).
The image enlarges at each click (1.2
times to 16 times).
Available operations
* The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You can
change this in [Quick Zoom] of the [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.222)
Four-way controller (2345) Moves the area to enlarge.
E-dial to the right (y) Enlarges the image (up to 16 times).
E-dial to the left (f) Reduces the image (up to 1.2 times*).
4 button Returns to the original size.
M button Switches information display On/Off.
• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during Instant
Review (p.71), Digital Preview (p.140) or Live View (p.163).
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of
0.675 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click
starts at 1.0 times.
2000 F5.6
JPEG
1/
100-0001
100-0001
200
ISO
x2.4
x2.4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 223 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
224
Playback Functions
7
Displaying Multiple Images
You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 thumbnail images on the monitor at the
same time. The default setting is nine image-display.
1
Turn the e-dial to the left (toward
f) in Playback mode.
The multi-image display screen
appears.
Up to nine thumbnail images will be
displayed at once.
Multi-image Display Screen
INFO
100-0001
Scroll bar
Selection frame
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 224 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
225
Playback Functions
7
Available operations
2
Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
Images will be grouped and displayed by folder in which they are saved.
1
In the multi-image display
screen, turn the e-dial to the left
(toward f) again.
The folder display screen appears.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the selection frame
M button Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting] screen. Use
the four-way controller (45) to select the number of
images to display at the same time.
(Display Type cannot be selected when developing
multiple RAW images (
p.260
).)
K/i button
Selects multiple images and deletes them. (p.236)
Icons such as C and ? are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image
display.
Displaying Images by Folder
INFO
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
Display Type
Multi-img Display Setting
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 225 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
226
Playback Functions
7
2
Select the folder you want to
display.
Available operations
3
Press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.
Images will be grouped and displayed by the shooting date.
1
In the multi-image display
screen, press the M button.
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen
appears.
Four-way controller (2345) Moves the selection frame.
K/i button Deletes the selected folder and all
the images in it. (p.238)
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar
Display)
100
_
0105
12345
100 101 102
103 104 105
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 226 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
227
Playback Functions
7
2
Press the M button again.
The calendar display screen appears.
Only the dates when pictures were taken
are displayed.
Available operations
3
Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
Four-way controller (23) Selects a shooting date.
Four-way controller (45) Selects an image taken on the selected
shooting date.
E-dial to the right (y) Displays the selected image. Turn to the left
(f) to return to the calendar display.
M button The camera returns to the multi-image
display screen.
K/i button Deletes selected images.
INFO
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
Display Type
Multi-img Display Setting
INFO
Delete
9
22
24
27
10
7
10
13
16
2010.
WED
FRI
MON
THU
SUN
SUN
WED
SAT
2010.
2/5
Thumbnail
Number of images shot on this date
Shooting date
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 227 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
228
Playback Functions
7
You can display two images side-by-side.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select g (Image
Comparison) and press the 4 button.
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.
3
Select two images you want to
compare using the e-dial and
compare them at left and right.
Available operations
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.
Comparing Images
4 button
Moves the selection frame to the right image, both
images, and left image each time the button is pressed.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the area to enlarge. When the selection
frame is placed on both images, you can manipulate
both images at the same time.
| button
Returns a position of the enlarged display area to the
center.
E-dial When the selection frame is placed on the left or
right image, the previous or next image is displayed.
When the selection frames are placed on both
images, you can enlarge or reduce both images
simultaneously in the same magnification.
M button Switches information display On/Off.
K/i button When the selection frame is placed on the left or
right image, the selected image is deleted.
100-0001
100-0001
100-0001
100-0001
MENU
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 228 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
229
Playback Functions
7
Join a number of images together and display them as an index print. You
can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You can select
the images to include in the index print and have them randomly-arranged.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index)
and press the 4 button.
The [Index] screen appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a layout and press the
4 button.
You can select o (Thumbnail),
p (Square), q (Random1),
r (Random2), s (Random3) or
p (Bubble).
Images are displayed according to the file
number (from the smallest number) for o, and are displayed in random
order for other layouts.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images] and
press the four-way controller (5).
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the number of images
and press the 4 button.
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.
When the number of saved images is
smaller than the number selected, empty
spaces will appear when [Layout] is set to
o and some images may be duplicated
for other layouts.
Joining Multiple Images (Index)
MENU
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
MENU
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
12
24
36
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 229 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
230
Playback Functions
7
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.]
and press the four-way controller (5).
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the background color
and press the 4 button.
You can select a white or black
background.
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Selection] and
press the four-way controller (5).
10
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a type of image
selection and press the 4
button.
11
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Create an index image]
and press the 4 button.
The index image is created and a
confirmation screen appears.
u All images
Picks images automatically from all of the images
saved.
w Manual
Individually select images you want to include in the
index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)] and
select the individual images.
x Folder name
Picks images automatically from the folder
selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder] and
select the folder.
MENU
12
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
MENU
12
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Cancel
Create an index image
OK
MENU
12
OK
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
Create an index image
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 230 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
231
Playback Functions
7
12
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save] or [Reshuffle]
and press the 4 button.
After the index image is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode
and the index image is displayed.
Save The index image is saved as a P and C file.
Reshuffle
Reselects the images to be included in the index and
displays a new index image. However, if [Thumbnail] is
selected for [Layout], this item is not displayed.
Processing may take a while when creating an index image.
MENU
Cancel
Reshuffle
Save
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 231 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
232
Playback Functions
7
Playing Back Images Continuously
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card
successively in the slideshow.
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.
1
Select [Slideshow] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select an item you want to
change.
The following items can be changed.
Setting the Slideshow Display
Item Description Setting
Interval Select an image display interval.
3sec. (default setting)/
5sec./10sec./30sec.
Screen
Effect
Select a transition effect when
the next image is displayed.
Off (default setting)/Fade/
Wipe/Stripe
Repeat
Playback
Set whether to start the
slideshow again from the
beginning after the last image is
displayed.
P (default setting)/O
Slideshow starts
Interval
Screen Effect
3sec.
Repeat Playback
Start
MENU
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 232 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
233
Playback Functions
7
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to change the setting and
press the 4 button.
1
Select [Start] in Step 2 on p.232 and press the 4 button.
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the playback mode palette
and press the 4 button.
The start screen is displayed and the
slideshow begins.
Available operations
Starting the Slideshow
4 button Pauses playback. Press again to resume
playback.
Four-way controller (4) Shows the previous image.
Four-way controller (5) Shows the next image.
Four-way controller (3) Stops playback.
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
Start
Cancel
MENU
OK
OK
3sec.
5sec.
10sec.
30sec.
OK
Start
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 233 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
234
Playback Functions
7
2
Stop the slideshow.
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed
during playback or pause.
- the four-way controller (3) is pressed
*1
- the Q button is pressed
*1
- the 3 button is pressed
*1
- the shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully
*2
- the mode dial is turned
*2
- the =/L button is pressed
*2
*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is
displayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during a
slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the
movie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 234 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
235
Playback Functions
7
Rotating Images
You can rotate an image counterclockwise in 90° increments at a time and
save the rotated image. The image rotation information is saved with the
image and during playback it will be displayed in portrait orientation.
1
Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image
Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail
images are displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a desired
rotation direction and press the
4 button.
The image rotation information is saved.
• When [18. Saving Rotation Info] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90) is
set to [Off], the image rotation information is not saved when shooting.
• When [Auto Image Rotation] (p.222) in the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to
O (On), the image with rotation information is automatically rotated during
playback.
You cannot change the image rotation information in the following conditions.
- when the image is protected
- when the image rotation information is not saved with the image
- when [Auto Image Rotation] (p.222) in the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to
P (Off)
MENU
OK
OK
Cancel
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 235 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
236
Playback Functions
7
Deleting Multiple Images
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.
1
Turn the e-dial to the left (toward
f) in Playback mode.
The multi-image display screen appears.
2
Press the K/i button.
The screen to select the images to delete
is displayed.
The screen temporarily changes to 36-
image display when [Multi-img Display
Setting] (p.224) is set to 81-image
display.
Deleting Selected Images
Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted.
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.
INFO
100-0001
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 236 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
237
Playback Functions
7
3
Select the images to delete.
Available operations
4
Press the K/i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Select & Delete].
6
Press the 4 button.
The selected images are deleted.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the selection frame
4 button Adds O and selects an image. Press again to return
to P. Protected images (Z) cannot be selected.
E-dial Displays a full screen display of the image selected
with the selection frame. When the image is
displayed full screen, press the four-way controller
(45) to display the previous or next image.
Delete
OK
MENU
MENU
OK
Cancel
Select & Delete
All selected images will
be deleted
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 237 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
238
Playback Functions
7
You can delete a selected folder and all the images in it.
1
Turn the e-dial two clicks to the
left (toward f) in Playback
mode.
The folder display screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a folder to
delete and press the K/i
button.
The delete folder confirmation screen
appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Delete].
4
Press the 4 button.
The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the four-
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.
Deleting a Folder
100
_
0105
12345
100 101 102
103 104 105
Cancel
100
_
0105
Delete
All images in selected
folder will be deleted
OK
OK
Leave All
Delete All
3image(s)
Protected images are found
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 238 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
239
Playback Functions
7
You can delete all saved images at once.
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Delete All Images].
3
Press the 4 button.
All images are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the four-
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.
Deleting All Images
Deleted images cannot be restored.
OK
Cancel
Delete All Images
All images will be deleted
from memory
OK
Leave All
Delete All
3image(s)
Protected images are found
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 239 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
240
Playback Functions
7
Protecting Images from Deletion
(Protect)
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
Z (Protect) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the protection setting method is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Single Image]
and press the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image to
protect.
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Protect].
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the
protection of the image.
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is
formatted.
Protecting a Single Image
MENU
All Images
Single Image
OK
OK
Unprotect
100-0105
100-0105
Protect
MENU
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 240 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
241
Playback Functions
7
6
Press the 4 button.
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of the
screen.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.
7
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to Playback mode.
1
Select [All Images] in Step 3 on p.240 and press the 4
button.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Protect] and press the
4 button.
All images saved on the SD Memory Card
are protected.
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the
protection of all images.
Protecting All Images
Unprotect
Protect
MENU
Protects all images
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 241 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
242
Playback Functions
7
Connecting the Camera to an AV
Device
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video input
terminal and play back images. Use the optional AV cable I-AVC7.
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the AV cable
toward the 2 mark on the camera, and connect the cable
to the PC/AV terminal.
3
Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video input
terminal on the AV device.
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC
adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) is recommended. (p.50)
• For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating
manual of the AV device, and select a suitable video input terminal for
connecting the camera.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connected
to the AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 242 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
243
Playback Functions
7
When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.60), the video
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the
country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video
output format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.
1
Select [Video Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [NTSC] or [PAL] and
press the 4 button.
3
Press the 3 button.
The video output format is set.
Selecting the Video Output Format
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting
the Time] in the World Time setting (p.270) to X (Destination), the video output
setting changes to the video output format for that city.
MENU
1 2 34
±0
MSC
Cancel OK
OK
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
Date
PAL
NTSC
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 243 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
244
Playback Functions
7
Exchanging Image Data with Other
Devices
This camera features infrared transmission (IrSimple/IrSS) which allows
you to send image data to cell phones and printers, as well as play a
dueling game with other W cameras.
Send and receive image data to and from other W cameras and other
devices that support infrared transmission, such as cell phones.
1
To send an image via infrared transmission, first select the
image in Playback mode.
2
Select [IrSimple] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [IrSimple] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Automatic
Resizing] and press the four-way controller (5).
Sending and Receiving Image Data via
Infrared Transmission
• Do not block the infrared port during infrared transmission.
• Infrared transmission may not operate properly if the infrared port is dirty.
When necessary, clean the port with a soft dry cloth.
• Data may not be properly transmitted under direct sunlight, directly under a
fluorescent light, or near infrared devices.
Only JPEG files can be sent or received.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 244 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
245
Playback Functions
7
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the number of recorded
pixels and press the 4 button.
5
Change the [Transmission Method] setting as necessary.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Send and
receive] and press the 4 button.
The screen to select either to send or receive data appears.
7
Bring the infrared ports of your camera and the other
device close together.
Operate infrared transmission on the other device.
Transmission is possible is within a distance of 20 cm, at an emission
angle of up to 15 degrees from the center.
i
When the number of pixels is larger than i, the image is resized
to i or less. (default setting)
Z
When the number of pixels is larger than Z, the image is resized
to Z or less.
OFF The image is not resized.
Standard (IrSimple)
Bi-directionally exchanges information with the other
device. (default setting)
IrSS
Transmits information in only one direction and does not accept
any answers or requests for resending from the other device.
Select this setting when specified by the other device.
IrSimple
MENU
Transmission Method
Automatic Resizing
Send and receive
Cancel OK
OK
2M
0.3M
OFF
20 cm
15°
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 245 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
246
Playback Functions
7
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Send] or [Receive] and
press the 4 button.
[Sending] or [Receiving] appears and the
data is transmitted.
Do not move the camera until data
transmission is complete.
When data transmission is successful,
[Send complete] or [Receive complete] appears.
You can play a game with other
W
cameras using infrared transmission.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select j
(Dueling Images) and press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to choose an image to use.
You can transmit data from i (IrSimple) in the playback mode palette if the
settings for [Automatic Resizing] and [Transmission Method] are not changed.
Playing a Dueling Game using Your Images
(Dueling Images)
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be used for Dueling
Images.
• Dueling Images uses the IrDA method of infrared transmission regardless of
the [IrSimple] setting in the [Q Playback 1] menu.
100-0001
MENU
Setting
Receive
Send
IrSimple
INFO
Exit OK
OK
100-0001
100-0001
MENU
Issue challenge
Game Score
Accept challenge
Select image
Select image
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 246 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
247
Playback Functions
7
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Accept
challenge] or [Issue challenge] and press the 4 button.
When your opponent selects [Accept challenge], select [Issue
challenge].
[Communication in progress] appears and the data is transmitted.
If the data is transmitted properly, your opponent’s image appears in the
right side of the [Prepare Your Image] screen.
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the order of parameters
to use.
Fighting strength is calculated based on
the shooting conditions.
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Start] and press the 4
button.
After [Communication in progress]
appears, the duel starts.
When the duel is over, the result appears.
7
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the single image
display.
VS
VS
YOU RIVAL
MENU
Start
Prepare Your Image
1
2
3
?
?
?
OK
OK
VS
VS
YOU RIVAL
MENU
Start
Prepare Your Image
1
2
3
?
?
?
OK
OK
Exit
OK
And the winner is. . .
Winner
YOU RIVAL
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 247 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
248
Playback Functions
7
• The image sent from the opponent is not saved.
• If you select [Game Score] in Step 3, you
can check the number of duels that you
have won and lost, and those that ended
in a draw. Press the | button in this
screen to reset the game score.
• If data transmission is not completed
properly or it is interrupted, the message
[Unable to establish data communication]
appears.
Win
Game Score
Lose
Draw
10
200
1
Reset
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 248 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
8 Processing Images
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken and
edit RAW images.
Changing the Image Size ...................................250
Processing Images with Digital Filters ............253
Developing RAW Images ...................................259
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 249 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
250
Processing Images
8
Changing the Image Size
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the image, and
saves the image as a new file.
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the selected
image and saves it as a new image. The number of recorded pixels can be
reduced while still obtaining an image with good quality.
1
Select an image to resize in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
n (Resize) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select the desired image size.
You can select one of the image sizes
starting from one size smaller than that of
the original image. The selectable sizes
vary according to the original image size
and aspect ratio.
5
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to select the quality level.
You can select C, D or E.
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and
Quality Level (Resize)
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.
• Images already resized to Z with this camera cannot be resized.
MENU
12M 10 M
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 250 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
251
Processing Images
8
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The resized image is saved as a new
image.
Cuts out only the desired area of the selected image and saves it as a new
image. The aspect ratio can also be changed.
1
Select an image to crop in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
o (Cropping) and press the 4 button.
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop
appears on the screen.
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.
• Images already resized to S or Z with this camera cannot be cropped.
Cancel
Save as
MENU
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
OK
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 251 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
252
Processing Images
8
4
Specify the size and position of
the area to crop by using
cropping frame.
Available operations
5
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The cropped image is saved as a new
image.
E-dial Changes the size of the cropping frame.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the cropping frame.
M button Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2],
[4:3], [16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be
rotated from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.
| button Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.
| appears only when the cropping frame can
be rotated.
OK
MENU
INFO
3:2
Aspect Ratio
Image Rotation
MENU
3:2
±0°
Cancel
Save as
MENU
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
OK
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 252 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
253
Processing Images
8
Processing Images with Digital
Filters
You can edit captured images using digital filters.
The following filters are available.
Filter name Effect Parameter
Toy Camera
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
shot with a toy camera.
Shading Level: +1 to +3
Blur: +1 to +3
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Retro
Creates an image with
the look of an old photo.
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/Thick
High Contrast
Enhances the
contrast in the image.
+1 to +5
Sketch Filter
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
drawn with a pencil.
Contrast: Low/Medium/High
Scratch Effect: OFF/ON
Water Color
Creates an image
that looks as though
it was painted.
Intensity: +1 to +3
Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High
Pastel
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
drawn with a crayon.
Weak/Standard/Strong
Posterization
Lessens the tone of the
image to create an image
that looks as though it
was hand-drawn.
+1 to +5
Miniature
Blurs part of the
image to create a
fake miniature scene.
In-Focus Plane: -3 to +3
Width: Narrow/Middle/Wide
Angle: Side/Vertical/Positive Slope/
Negative Slope
Blur: +1 to +3
Base
Parameter
Adj
Adjusts the
parameters to create
the desired image.
Brightness: -8 to +8
Saturation: -3 to +3
Hue: -3 to +3
Contrast: -3 to +3
Sharpness: -3 to +3
Monochrome
Creates a monochrome
image such as a black-
and-white photo.
Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Infrared Filter
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 253 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
254
Processing Images
8
Color
Adds a color filter to
the image. Select
from 18 filters (6
colors × 3 tones).
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark
Extract Color
Extracts two specific
colors and makes the
rest of the image
black and white.
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 1: -2 to +2
Extracted Color 2: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2: -2 to +2
Soft
Creates an image
with a soft focus
throughout the image.
Soft Focus: +1 to +3
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Starburst
For taking pictures of
night scenes or lights
reflected on water
with a special
sparkling look by
adding extra glitter to
the highlights.
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/Heart/
Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
Fish-eye
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
shot with a fish-eye lens.
Weak/Medium/Strong
Slim
Changes the
horizontal and vertical
ratio of images.
-8 to +8
HDR
Creates an image that
looks like a high
dynamic range image.
Weak/Medium/Strong
Custom Filter
Customize and save
a filter to your own
preferences.
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
Filter name Effect Parameter
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 254 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
255
Processing Images
8
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback
mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital
Filter) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a filter appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a filter and
press the 4 button.
After selecting a filter, you can check the
effect on the screen.
You can select a different image by
turning the e-dial.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a parameter
and the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.
Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using the
Digital Filter.
Applying the Digital Filter
Toy Camera
Toy Camera
OKExit
MENU
100-0001
100-0001
OK
Red
Red
OK
MENU
100-0001
100-0001
Slim
Slim
OK
MENU
100-0001
100-0001
Color Filter Slim Filter
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 255 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
256
Processing Images
8
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Use filters in
combination] or [Save as].
Select [Use filters in combination] when
you want to apply additional filters to the
same image.
8
Press the 4 button.
If [Use filters in combination] was selected, the camera returns to Step 4.
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new
image.
Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and apply the same
filter effects to other images.
1
Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.
2
Select D (Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette.
Up to 20 filters, including a digital filter used during shooting (p.155), can be
combined to the same image.
Recreating Filter Effects
MENU
OK
Cancel
Save as
Use filters in combination
Continue selecting filters?
Continue selecting filters?
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 256 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
257
Processing Images
8
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Recreating filter
effects] and press the 4
button.
The history of the filter set for the selected
image appears.
4
To check the parameter details,
press the M button.
You can check the filter parameters.
5
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image for applying
the same filter effects and press
the 4 button.
You can only select an image that has not
been processed with a filter.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The filter-processed image is saved as a
new image.
MENU
Searching for the original image
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
OK
OK
Details
MENU
Reapplies following digital filter
effects from previous image
Reapplies following digital filter
effects from previous image
1. 5. 9.
13. 17. - -
2. 6.
10. 14. 18. - -
3. 7.
11. 15. 19. - -
4. 8.
12. 16. 20. - -
100-0001
100-0001
INFO
OK
OK
MENU
Performs digital filter
processing to this image
Performs digital filter
processing to this image
100-0001
100-0001
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
Save as
Saves the image as a new file
Saves the image as a new file
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 257 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
258
Processing Images
8
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter
application.
1
Select [Searching for the original
image] in Step 3 on p.257 and
press the 4 button.
The original image prior to digital filter
application is retrieved.
Searching for the Original Image
If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message
[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.
MENU
Searching for the original image
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 258 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
259
Processing Images
8
Developing RAW Images
You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG files.
1
Select a RAW image in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW
Development) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a development method is displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Developing a Single
Image] and press the 4 button.
The parameters recorded in the image file
appear.
You can select a different image by
turning the e-dial.
To specify the parameters before
developing, refer to “Specifying the
Parameters” (p.262).
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG
files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.
Developing One RAW Image
MENU
OK
Developing Multiple Images
Developing a Single Image
OK
MENU
12
M
sRGB
sRGB
RAW
RAW
JPEG
JPEG
OK
100-0001
ISO
NR
File Format
File Format
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 259 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
260
Processing Images
8
5
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved
as a new image.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Continue] or [Exit].
Select [Continue] to edit other images.
8
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Continue] in Step 7, the screen for selecting the parameter
in Step 4 appears again.
You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.
1
Select [Developing Multiple Images] in Step 4 on p.259 and
press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen appears.
Refer to p.224 for details on operations in the multi-image display screen.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW
images to be developed and press the 4 button.
Developing Multiple RAW Images
Cancel
Save as
MENU
Saves the image as a new file
RAW JPEG
OK
OK
Exit
Continue
Image developed and stored.
Continue developing?
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 260 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
261
Processing Images
8
3
Press the M button.
The development confirmation screen
appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Develop images as
shot] or [Develop images with
modified settings].
To change parameters, select [Develop
images with modified settings]. For
details, refer to “Specifying the
Parameters” (p.262).
The screen to select a parameter appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to set [Recorded
Pixels] and [Quality Level].
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The selected RAW images are developed
and saved as new images.
MENU
OK
OK
Develop images as shot
Develop images with
modified settings
RAW
RAW
JPEG
JPEG
MENU
Recorded Pixels
Recorded Pixels
OK
12M
Cancel
Save as
MENU
Selected images are saved
as new files
RAW JPEG
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 261 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
262
Processing Images
8
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.
The following parameters can be changed.
*1 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.
*2 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.211)
1
Press the four-way controller
(23) in Step 4 on p.259 to
choose the parameter you want
to change.
Specifying the Parameters
Parameter Value Page
Recorded Pixels
E (4288×2848)/J (3936×2624)/
P (3072×2048)/i (1728×1152)
p.192
Quality Level C (Best) / D (Better) / E (Good) p.193
Custom Image
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/
Muted/Bleach Bypass/Reversal Film/
Monochrome
p.213
White Balance
*1
F (Auto)/G (Daylight)/H (Shade)/
^ (Cloudy)/JD (Fluorescent Light Daylight
Color)/JN (Fluorescent Light Daylight
White)/JW (Fluorescent Light Cool White)/
JL (Fluorescent Light Warm White)/
I (Tungsten Light)/L (Flash)/f/
K (Manual)
p.200
Sensitivity -2.0 to +2.0 –
High-ISO NR Auto/Off/Low/Medium/High p.100
Shadow Correction Off/Low/Medium/High p.208
Distortion Correction
*2
Off/On p.211
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
*2
Off/On p.211
Color Space sRGB/AdobeRGB p.205
MENU
12
M
sRGB
sRGB
RAW
RAW
JPEG
JPEG
OK
100-0001
ISO
NR
File Format
File Format
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 262 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
263
Processing Images
8
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the setting screen for White
Balance and Custom Image.
3
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.
• You cannot save the background image and use Digital Preview with White
Balance and Custom Image.
• When the white balance is set to K (Manual), press the mc button to
display the measuring screen.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 263 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Memo
264
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 264 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
9 Changing Additional
Settings
This chapter describes how to change additional settings.
How to Operate the Set-up Menu ......................266
Formatting an SD Memory Card .......................268
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display
Language ............................................................269
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display ..274
Setting the Folder/File Number .........................279
Selecting the Power Settings ............................281
Setting the Photographer Information .............283
Setting the DPOF Settings ................................285
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS
Sensor (Pixel Mapping) .....................................287
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera
(Memory) .............................................................288
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 265 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
266
Changing Additional Settings
9
How to Operate the Set-up Menu
Perform general settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.
Perform the following settings in the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way
controller (45) or e-dial to display the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.37).
Set-up Menu Setting Items
Menu Item Function Page
R1
Language/u
Changes the language in which menus and
messages appear.
p.273
Date Adjustment Sets the date format and time. p.270
World Time
Sets the display of the local date and time
of the specified city so they can be
displayed on the monitor in addition to the
present location when traveling overseas.
p.270
Text Size
Sets the text size of an item selected on the
respective menu screens.
p.274
Beep
Switches the beep tone on/off and changes
its volume.
p.269
Guide Display
Sets whether to display indicators on the
monitor.
p.274
Status Screen
Sets the display color of the status screen
and control panel.
p.276
R2
Brightness Level Changes the brightness of the monitor. p.277
LCD Color Tuning Adjusts the color of the monitor. p.278
Video Out
Sets the output format when connecting to
an AV device with a video input terminal.
p.243
USB Connection
Sets the USB connection mode when
connecting to a computer.
p.293
Folder Name
Sets the naming system of the folder for
storing images.
p.279
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 266 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
267
Changing Additional Settings
9
R2
Create New Folder
Creates a new folder on the SD Memory
Card.
p.279
Copyright
Information
Sets the photographer and copyright
information embedded in Exif.
p.283
R3
Auto Power Off
Sets the time until the camera turns off
automatically.
p.281
AA Battery Type
Selects the type of AA batteries used for
the camera.
p.282
Reset Resets all settings. p.310
R4
Pixel Mapping
Maps out and corrects any defective pixels
in the CMOS sensor.
p.287
Dust Alert
Detects dust adhering to the CMOS
sensor.
p.316
Dust Removal Cleans the CMOS sensor by shaking it. p.315
Sensor Cleaning
Locks the mirror in the up position for
cleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.
p.318
Format Formats an SD Memory Card. p.268
Menu Item Function Page
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Exit
MENU
234
English
Guide Display
Status Screen
Beep
3sec.
Standard
1
[R Set-up 1] menu
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name Date
Exit
MENU
1 2 3 4
±0
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
NTSC
MSC
[R Set-up 2] menu
Auto Power Off 1min.
AA Battery Type
Reset
Exit
MENU
123 4
AUTO
[R Set-up 3] menu
Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
Dust Removal
Sensor Cleaning
Format
Exit
MENU
1234
[R Set-up 4] menu
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 267 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
268
Changing Additional Settings
9
Formatting an SD Memory Card
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused
or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.
1
Select [Format] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Format] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Format].
3
Press the 4 button.
Formatting starts.
When formatting is completed, the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
menu appears again.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be
damaged and become unusable.
• Formatting deletes all data, either protected or unprotected. Be aware.
When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card
is “K-r”. When the W is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card is
recognized as a removable disk with the name “K-r”. (p.294)
OK
Format
Cancel
Format
All data will be deleted
OK
Formatting
Formatting
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 268 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
269
Changing Additional Settings
9
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and
Display Language
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off, or change its volume.
By default, all available items are set to O (On), and the volume level is
set to [3]. The following six items can be set.
•In-focus
• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)
• Self-timer
• Remote Control
• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format]
is assigned to the | button)
• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when changing AF point is
enabled or disabled)
1
Select [Beep] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press the four-
way controller (5).
The [Beep 1] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to adjust the volume.
Select from six levels. When set to 0, you can turn all the beeps off.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select an item.
Turn the e-dial to display the [Beep 2]
screen.
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or
P (Off).
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the Beep
Beep
Volume
In-focus
AE-L
Self-timer
Remote Control
One Push File Format
MENU
1 2
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 269 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
270
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can change the initial date and time settings, and set their display
formats. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] for the date
display format, and [12h] (12-hour display) or [24h] (24-hour display) for
the time display format.
Set in [Date Adjustment] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.266).
1 Setting the Date and Time (p.64)
The date and time selected in “Initial Settings” (p.60) serve as the date and
time of your present location.
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local
date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.
1
Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [World Time] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select X (Destination) or W
(Hometown) for [Setting the
Time].
This setting is reflected on the date and
time that appear in the guide display and
control panel.
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).
Changing the Date and Time Display
Setting the World Time
MENU
/
00 00
:
///
24h
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
Time
Settings complete
Cancel
//20100101
mm
dd yy
World Time
Setting the Time
Destination
London
Hometown
New York
MENU
16
00
:
10 00
:
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 270 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
271
Changing Additional Settings
9
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [X Destination] screen appears.
5
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a destination city.
Turn the e-dial to change the region.
The location, time difference and current
time of the selected city appear.
6
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [DST].
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or
P (Off).
Select O if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).
8
Press the 4 button.
The destination setting is saved and the camera returns to the [World
Time] screen.
9
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.272) for cities that can be selected as
a destination.
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to set the city and DST setting.
• X appears in the guide display and control panel if [Setting the Time] is set
to X (Destination). (p.24)
• When you switch [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output
(p.243) setting changes to the video output format for that city.
Destination
DST
London
Cancel
MENU
+06:00
16:00
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 271 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
272
Changing Additional Settings
9
List of World Time Cities
Region City Region City
North
America
Honolulu Africa/
West Asia
Dakar
Anchorage Algiers
Vancouver Johannesburg
San Francisco Istanbul
Los Angeles Cairo
Calgary Jerusalem
Denver Nairobi
Chicago Jeddah
Miami Tehran
Toronto Dubai
New York Karachi
Halifax Kabul
Central and
South
America
Mexico City Male
Lima Delhi
Santiago Colombo
Caracas Kathmandu
Buenos Aires Dacca
Sao Paulo
East Asia
Yangon
Rio de Janeiro Bangkok
Europe
Lisbon Kuala Lumpur
Madrid Vientiane
London Singapore
Paris Phnom Penh
Amsterdam Ho chi Minh
Milan Jakarta
Rome Hong Kong
Copenhagen Beijing
Berlin Shanghai
Prague Manila
Stockholm Taipei
Budapest Seoul
Warsaw Tokyo
Athens Guam
Helsinki
Moscow
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 272 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
273
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed.
The camera supports the following languages: English, French, German,
Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish,
Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
Set in [Language/u] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.266).
1 Setting the Display Language (p.60)
Region City
Oceania
Perth
Adelaide
Sydney
Noumea
Wellington
Auckland
Pago Pago
Setting the Display Language
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 273 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
274
Changing Additional Settings
9
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu
Display
You can set the text size of an item selected on the respective menu
screens to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
Set in [Text Size] of the [R Set-up 1] menu
(p.266).
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when
the camera is turned on or the Capture mode is changed. (p.24)
Select from [3 sec.] (default setting), [10 sec.], [30 sec.] and [Off].
Set in [Guide Display] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.266).
Setting the Text Size
Setting the Guide Display Time
MENU
1 234
English
3sec.
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Guide Display
Status Screen
Beep
Cancel OK
OK
Standard
Large
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Guide Display
Status Screen
Beep
MENU
1 234
English
Cancel OK
OK
3sec.
10sec.
30sec.
Off
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 274 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
275
Changing Additional Settings
9
Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button
is pressed.
1
Select [19. Save Menu Location] in the [A Custom Setting
3] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [19. Save Menu Location] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Reset Menu Location]
or [Save Menu Location] and
press the 4 button.
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed
1 Reset Menu Location
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu ([Q Playback
1] menu in Playback mode) is always
displayed first. (default setting)
2 Save Menu Location The menu tab last selected is displayed first.
19.
1
2
Save Menu Location
Reset Menu Location
Save Menu Location
Pressing the menu button
Cancel
MENU
accesses the last used
menu tab
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 275 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
276
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can set the display color of the status screen and control panel.
1
Select [Status Screen] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Status Screen] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select from six display colors.
3
Press the 3 button twice.
The display color of the status screen and control panel are changed.
You can set the Instant Review display settings.
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Instant Review] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select a display time.
Setting the Status Screen Display
Setting the Display for Instant Review
1/
125
5.6
F
MENU
1
Status Screen
Display Color
Instant Review
MENU
Display Time
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
Cancel OK
OK
1sec.
3sec.
5sec.
Off
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 276 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
277
Changing Additional Settings
9
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge Instant Review].
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
When [Enlarge Instant Review] is set to O (default setting), you can
magnify the image with the e-dial. (p.223)
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust the settings when the
monitor is hard to see.
1
Select [Brightness Level] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Brightness Level] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to adjust the brightness.
You can select from 15 brightness levels.
The value is reset to ±0 when the |
button is pressed.
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor
MENU
Brightness Level
±0
Cancel OK
OK
+2
+2
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 277 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
278
Changing Additional Settings
9
You can adjust the color of the monitor.
1
Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.
2
Adjust the color.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.
Available operations
3
Press the 4 button.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G)
and magenta (M).
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B)
and amber (A).
| button Resets the adjustment value.
E-dial Displays a saved image in the background so
you can adjust the color while viewing the
image. This is useful for matching the color of
the monitor with that of a computer.
MENU
GG
BBA
A
A
MM
±0 ±0
±0
OK
OKCancel
LCD Color Tuning
LCD Color Tuning
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 278 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
279
Changing Additional Settings
9
Setting the Folder/File Number
You can select a naming system of the folder for storing images.
Set in [Folder Name] of the [R Set-up 2]
menu (p.266).
Creates a new folder on an SD Memory Card. A folder is created with the
number following the number of the folder currently being used.
1
Select [Create New Folder] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Create New Folder] screen appears.
Changing the Naming System of the Folder
Date
The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is
a sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day)
appears according to the display style set in [Date Adjustment]
(p.270). (default setting)
Example) 101_0125: Folder for images taken on January 25th
PENTX
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].
Example) 101PENTX
Creating New Folders
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
MENU
1 2 34
NTSC
±0
MSC
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
Cancel OK
OK
Date
PENTX
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 279 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
280
Changing Additional Settings
9
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Create folder] and
press the 4 button.
A folder with a new number is created.
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when
saved to a new folder. Set in [File No.] in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu.
Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders
cannot be created consecutively.
Selecting the File Number Setting
O
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved and
subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new
folder is created.
P
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 each time
a new folder is created for saving images.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Exposure Bracketing
shooting, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed,
even if the number of images exceeds 500.
Create New Folder
Cancel
Create folder
Creates a new storage folder
with the following name:
101 PENTX
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 280 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
281
Changing Additional Settings
9
Selecting the Power Settings
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain
length of time. Select from [1 min.] (default setting), [3 min.], [5 min.],
[10 min.], [30 min.] or [Off].
Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]
menu (p.267).
Setting the Auto Power Off Function
• The Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.
- when the Live View image is displayed
- when the slideshow is played back
- when the camera is connected to a computer with an USB cable
• If the camera turns off after the set length of time, perform one of the following
operations to reactivate it.
- Turn on the camera again.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
-Press the Q button, the 3 button, or the M button.
Auto Power Off
AA Battery Type
Reset
MENU
123 4
Cancel OK
OK
1min.
3min.
5min.
10min.
30min.
Off
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 281 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
282
Changing Additional Settings
9
Sets the type of AA batteries used in the camera. The default setting is
[Auto-detect].
1
Select [AA Battery Type] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [AA Battery Type] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a battery type and press
the 4 button.
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will
automatically detect the type of batteries
being used.
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the Battery Type
When the type of batteries being used is different from the item you selected,
the battery level will not be correctly determined. Make sure that the correct
battery type is selected in the [AA Battery Type] setting. Usually, there is no
problem using [Auto-detect]. However in low temperatures and when using
batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate battery
type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.
Auto Power Off 1min.
MENU
123 4
AUTO
Cancel OK
OK
AA Battery Type
Auto-detect
Nickel-Metal Hydride
Alkaline
Lithium
AUTO
AUTO
Ni-MH
AL
Li
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 282 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
283
Changing Additional Settings
9
Setting the Photographer Information
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are
automatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You
can embed photographer information in this Exif.
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select O or P.
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Photographer]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software (p.298) to check
the Exif information.
O
Embeds copyright information in the
Exif.
P
Does not embed copyright
information in the Exif. (default
setting)
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
MENU
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 283 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
284
Changing Additional Settings
9
4
Enter the text.
Up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters
and symbols can be
entered.
Available operations
5
After entering the text, move the
text selection cursor to [Finish]
and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Copyright
Information] screen.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Copyright
Holder] and enter the text in the same way as
[Photographer].
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
E-dial Moves the text input cursor.
| button Switches between upper and lower case letters.
4 button Enters a character selected with the text
selection cursor at the position of the text input
cursor.
K/i button Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.
Photographer
Cancel
Delete One Character
Enter
Finish
OK
MENU
Text selection
cursor
Text input
cursor
MENU
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 284 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
285
Changing Additional Settings
9
Setting the DPOF Settings
You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the
number of copies and whether to imprint the date.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF)
and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Single Image] or [All
Images] and press the 4
button.
4
When [Single Image] is selected
in Step 3, use the four-way
controller (45) to select an
image to set DPOF settings.
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images and movies.
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.
MENU
All Images
Single Image
OK
OK
MENU
00
100-0105
100-0105
OK
Date
Date
Copies Date
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 285 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
286
Changing Additional Settings
9
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of
copies.
You can set up to 99 copies.
K appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.
To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].
6
Turn the e-dial to select O or P
for printing the date.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF
settings for other images (up to 999).
7
Press the 4 button.
The DPOF settings for the selected image is saved and the camera
returns to Playback mode.
O The date will be printed.
P The date will not be printed.
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,
the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the date for DPOF setting
is set to O.
• The number of copies specified in the All Images setting applies to all the
images, and that specified in the Single Image setting is canceled. Before
printing, check that the specified number is correct.
MENU
01
100-0105
100-0105
OK
Date
Date
Copies Date
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 286 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
287
Changing Additional Settings
9
Correcting Defective Pixels in the
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)
Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels
in the CMOS sensor.
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Pixel Mapping] and
press the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped and
corrected, and the screen that was
displayed before selecting the menu
appears again.
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate
Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC109
(optional) or change to the battery with ample power remaining.
OK
Pixel Mapping
Cancel
Pixel Mapping
Checks the image sensor
and corrects defective pixels
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 287 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
288
Changing Additional Settings
9
Selecting Settings to Save in the
Camera (Memory)
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned
off. The following function settings can be saved.
1
Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Memory 1] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose an item.
Turn the e-dial to display the [Memory 2]
screen.
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Function Default
Setting
Function Default
Setting
Flash Mode O Cross Processing P
Drive Mode O Digital Filter P
White Balance O HDR Capture P
Custom Image O Shooting Info Display P
Sensitivity O Playback Info Display O
EV Compensation O File No. O
Flash Exposure Comp. O
O Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.
P
Settings are cleared and returned to their default values when the
camera is turned off.
Memory
MENU
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.
1 2
Custom Image
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 288 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
289
Changing Additional Settings
9
• Set [File No.] to O (On) to continue the sequential numbering for the file
name even if a new folder is created. Refer to “Selecting the File Number
Setting” (p.280).
• When the [R Set-up] menu is reset (p.310), all Memory settings return to the
default values.
• If [Shooting Info Display] is set to P (Off), the status screen is always
displayed first when the camera is turned on. (p.26)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 289 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Memo
290
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 290 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
10 Connecting to a
Computer
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to your
computer, install the supplied CD-ROM, etc.
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer ............................................................292
Saving Images on Your Computer ...................293
Using the Provided Software ............................296
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 291 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
292
Connecting to a Computer
10
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by
connecting the W using a USB cable and can be managed using the
provided software.
We recommend the following system requirements to connect your
camera to a computer or to use the software “PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4” included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Windows
Macintosh
OS
Windows XP (SP3 or later), Windows Vista, or Windows 7 (can
be run as a 32-bit application on any x64 Edition of Windows.)
CPU
Pentium D 3.0 GHz equivalent or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo
processor 2.0 GHz equivalent or higher recommended)
RAM 2.0 GB minimum (3.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)
Monitor
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)
with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
Others USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
OS Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5, or 10.6
CPU
PowerPC G5 Dual-core 2.0 GHz or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo
processor 2.0 GHz or higher recommended. Universal Binary
format.)
RAM 2.0 GB minimum (4.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)
Monitor
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)
with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
Others USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 292 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
293
Connecting to a Computer
10
Saving Images on Your Computer
Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via the
provided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].
1
Select [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [MSC] or [PTP].
Refer to p.294 for details.
3
Press the 4 button.
The setting is changed.
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Setting the USB Connection Mode
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Cancel OK
OK
MENU
1 2
3
4
NTSC
±0
Copyright Information
MSC
PTP
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 293 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
294
Connecting to a Computer
10
1
Turn your computer on.
2
Turn off your camera and use the provided USB cable to
connect your camera and your computer.
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera
and Your Computer
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to
the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard
for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without
installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP
without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the W
to your computer.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 294 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
295
Connecting to a Computer
10
3
Turn your camera on.
The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Card
with a volume label “K-r”.
If the “K-r” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Open
folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.
4
Save the captured images to your computer.
Drag and drop the image file(s) or the folder containing the image files in
your camera to the hard disk of your computer or the desktop.
5
Disconnect your camera from your computer.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 295 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
296
Connecting to a Computer
10
Using the Provided Software
“PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” is included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Using the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4, you can manage images saved
on your computer, and develop RAW files taken with the W and adjust
the color of the images.
Compatible file formats: .bmp (BMP)/.jpg (JPEG)/.pef (files recorded in
PENTAX original RAW format)/.png (PNG)/.tif
(TIFF)/.dng (DNG format RAW file)
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.
When multiple accounts have been setup on your computer, log on with
an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.
1
Turn your computer on.
Make sure no other software is running.
2
Place the CD-ROM (S-SW110) into the CD-ROM drive on
your computer.
The [PENTAX Software Installer] screen appears.
Installing the Software
If the [PENTAX Software Installer] screen does not appear
• For Windows
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.
2 Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW110)] icon.
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.
• For Macintosh
1 Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW110) icon on the desktop.
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 296 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
297
Connecting to a Computer
10
3
Click [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4].
For Windows, proceed to Step 4.
For Macintosh, follow the instructions
on the screen to perform subsequent
steps.
4
Select the desired language in
the [Choose Setup Language]
screen and click [OK].
5
When the [InstallShield
Wizard] screen appears in the
selected language, click
[Next].
Follow the instructions on the screen
to perform subsequent steps.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 297 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
298
Connecting to a Computer
10
When PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 is launched, the following screen
(browser) appears.
Browser tab set (default setting)
You can perform the file management functions such as viewing and
organizing the images.
1Menu Bar
This executes functions or makes various settings.
For Macintosh, the Menu bar appears at the top of the desktop.
2Tool Bar
Frequently used functions are provided as Tool bar buttons.
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
The screenshots used in this explanation are for Windows.
1
5
343
2
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 298 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
299
Connecting to a Computer
10
3Control Panel
Shooting information and settings of the selected image appear in this
panel. The set of tab pages displayed in Control Panel can be changed
by pressing the Browser, Laboratory and Custom buttons on the Tool
bar.
4File Display Pane
The file list and the images in the selected folder appear here.
5Status Bar
Information on the selected item appears.
Laboratory tab set (default setting)
The control panel for adjusting the image appears here.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 299 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
300
Connecting to a Computer
10
Custom tab set (default setting)
The screen display can be customized here. The Custom tab pages
enable you to customize whether to show/hide the various tab pages in
accordance with your needs. By default, all tab pages are displayed.
Refer to Help for details on using the software program.
1
Click the button on the Tool
bar.
Or, select [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility Help] from the [Help] menu.
Viewing Detailed Information on the Software
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 300 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
301
Connecting to a Computer
10
Regarding Product Registration
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.
Click [Product Registration] on the
screen in Step 3 on p.297.
A world map for Internet Product
Registration is displayed. If your
computer is connected to the
Internet, click the displayed country
or region and then follow the
instructions to register your software.
Note that you can only register online
if your country or area is shown.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 301 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Memo
302
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 302 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
11 Appendix
Default Settings ..................................................304
Resetting the Menus ..........................................310
Functions Available with Various Lens
Combinations .....................................................312
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................315
Optional Accessories ........................................320
Error Messages ..................................................325
Troubleshooting .................................................328
Main Specifications ............................................331
Glossary ..............................................................337
Index ....................................................................342
WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................348
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 303 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
304
Appendix
11
Default Settings
The table below shows the factory default settings.
The functions set in Memory (p.288) are saved even when the camera is
turned off.
Reset Setting
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function
(p.310).
No: The setting is saved even after reset.
Direct Keys
[A Rec. Mode] Menu
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Drive Mode 9 (Single Frame Shooting) Yes
p.118
p.145
p.147
p.149
Flash Mode Depends on Capture mode Yes p.75
White Balance F (Auto) Yes p.200
Sensitivity AUTO (ISO 200 - 3200) Yes p.98
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Custom Image Bright Yes
*1
p.213
File Format JPEG Yes p.195
JPEG Recorded Pixels E (4288×2848) Yes p.192
JPEG Quality C (Best) Yes p.193
AF Mode f Yes p.125
AE Metering L (Multi-segment) Yes p.114
Select AF Point b (5 AF Points) Yes p.129
Cross Processing
Off
Yes p.216
Digital Filter Not use any filters Yes p.155
HDR Capture Off Yes p.209
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 304 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
305
Appendix
11
Multi-
exposure
Number of Shots 2 times Yes
p.153
Auto EV Adjustment P (Off) Yes
Interval
Shooting
Interval 1sec. Yes
p.151
Number of Shots 2 images Yes
Start Interval Now Yes
Start Time 12:00AM / 00:00 Yes
High-ISO NR Auto Yes p.100
Slow Shutter Speed NR Auto Yes p.102
Movie
Recorded Pixels
b
(1280×720, 16:9)
Yes
p.165
Quality Level
C (Best) Yes
Sound g (On) Yes
Cross Processing Off Yes
Digital Filter Not use any filters Yes
Movie Aperture Control Fixed Yes
Shake Reduction l (Off) Yes
Live View
Autofocus Method I
(Face Detection AF)
Yes
p.160
Show Grid Off Yes
Info Overlay O (On) Yes
Histogram
P (Off) Yes
Bright/Dark Area P (Off) Yes
Instant
Review
Display Time 1 sec. Yes
p.276
Histogram P (Off) Yes
Bright/Dark Area P (Off) Yes
Enlarge Instant Review O (On) Yes
D-Range
Setting
Highlight Correction Off Yes p.207
Shadow Correction Off Yes p.208
Lens
Correction
Distortion Correction Off Yes
p.211
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj Off Yes
Color Space sRGB Yes p.205
RAW File Format PEF Yes p.196
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 305 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
306
Appendix
11
*1 The parameters specified in [Custom Image] are also reset.
*2 The setting returns to [Green Button] after reset.
Green
Button
Green Button
Green Button Green Button Yes
p.197
Custom Image
*2
—Yes
Optical Preview
*2
—Yes
Digital
Preview
*2
Histogram P (Off) Yes
Bright/Dark
Area
P (Off) Yes
Enlarge
Instant
Review
O (On) Yes
Digital Filter
*2
—Yes
Cross Processing
*2
—Yes
One Push
File
Format
*2
Cancel
after 1 shot
O (On) Yes
JPEG/
RAW/
RAW+ File
Format
All RAW+ Yes
Action in M Mode P LINE Yes p.112
E-dial in Program P SHIFT Yes p.105
AF/AE-L Button Enable AF1 Yes
p.120
p.123
Memory
Cross Processing, Digital
Filter, HDR Capture,
Shooting Info Display
P (Off) Yes
p.288
Other than the above
functions
O (On) Yes
Shake Reduction k (On) Yes p.142
Input Focal Length
35 mm
Yes p.143
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 306 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
307
Appendix
11
Playback Mode Palette
*1 The parameters specified in [Digital Filter] are also reset.
[Q Playback] Menu
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Image Rotation — — p.235
Digital Filter Toy Camera Yes
*1
p.253
Resize
Maximum size according to
the setting
—p.250
Cropping
Maximum size according to
the setting
—p.251
Slideshow — Yes p.233
RAW Development
File Format: JPEG
Recorded Pixels: E
Quality Level: C
Yes p.259
Index — — p.229
Image Comparison — — p.228
Protect — No p.240
DPOF — No p.285
Movie Editing — — p.171
IrSimple — — p.244
Dueling Images — — p.246
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Slideshow
Interval 3 sec. Yes
p.232Screen Effect Off Yes
Repeat Playback
P (Off) Yes
Quick Zoom Off Yes
p.222Bright/Dark Area
P (Off) Yes
Auto Image Rotation O (On) Yes
IrSimple
Automatic
Resizing
i Yes
p.244
Transmission
Method
Standard (IrSimple) Yes
Delete All Images — — p.239
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 307 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
308
Appendix
11
[R Set-up] Menu
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
Language/u
According to default setting No p.273
Date Adjustment According to default setting No p.270
World
Time
World Time setting W (Hometown) Yes
p.270
Hometown (City) According to default setting No
Hometown (DST) According to default setting No
Destination (City) Same as Hometown No
Destination (DST) Same as Hometown No
Text Size
According to default setting No p.274
Beep
Volume 3
Yes p.269
Setting All O (On)
Guide Display 3 sec. Yes p.274
Status Screen 1 Yes p.276
Brightness Level
±0
Yes p.277
LCD Color Tuning ±0 Yes p.278
Video Out According to default setting No p.243
USB Connection
MSC
Yes p.293
Folder Name Date Yes p.279
Create New Folder — — p.279
Copyright
Information
Embed Copyright
Data
P (Off) Yes
p.283
Photographer — No
Copyright Holder — No
Auto Power Off 1 min. Yes p.281
AA Battery Type
Auto-detect
Yes p.282
Reset — — p.310
Pixel Mapping — —
p.287
Dust Alert — —
p.316
Dust
Removal
Dust Removal
——
p.315
Start-up Action
P (Off)
Yes
Sensor Cleaning — — p.318
Format — — p.268
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 308 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
309
Appendix
11
[A Custom Setting] Menu
*1
The adjustment values can be reset only in the [21. AF Fine Adjustment] screen.
Item Default Setting
Reset
Setting
Page
1. EV Steps 1/3 EV Steps Yes p.118
2. Sensitivity Steps 1 EV Step Yes p.99
3. Expanded Sensitivity Off Yes p.99
4. Meter Operating Time 10 sec. Yes p.116
5. AE-L with AF Locked Off Yes p.133
6. Link AE to AF Point Off Yes p.115
7. Auto Bracketing Order 0 - + Yes p.118
8. Superimpose AF Area On Yes p.130
9. AF.S Setting Focus-priority Yes p.125
10. AF.C Setting Focus-priority Yes p.126
11. AF Assist Light On Yes p.127
12. WB When Using Flash Auto White Balance Yes p.201
13. AWB in Tungsten Light Subtle Correction Yes —
14. AF with Remote Control Off Yes p.148
15. Remote Control in Bulb Mode1 Yes p.114
16. Release While Charging Off Yes p.81
17. Flash in Wireless Mode On Yes p.184
18. Saving Rotation Info On Yes p.235
19. Save Menu Location Reset Menu Location Yes p.275
20. Catch-in Focus Off Yes p.136
21. AF Fine Adjustment Off Yes
*1
p.128
22. Using Aperture Ring Prohibited Yes p.314
Reset Custom Functions — — p.311
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 309 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
310
Appendix
11
Resetting the Menus
Settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up]
menu, direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default
settings.
1
Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the four-
way controller (5).
The [Reset] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
menu appears again.
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up
Menus
Language/u, Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [A Custom Setting] menu
settings are not reset.
Reset
Cancel
Reset
Returns to default settings
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 310 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
311
Appendix
11
Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default values.
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
menu appears again.
Resetting the Custom Menu
Reset Custom Functions
Cancel
Reset
Returns the custom function
settings to default values
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 311 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
312
Appendix
11
Functions Available with Various
Lens Combinations
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses which have an s
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default
settings. Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for other
lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position other
than s.
z : Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s position.
# : Some functions are restricted.
× : Functions are unavailable.
Lens
[Mount type]
Function
DA
DA L
D FA
FA J
FA
*6
F
*6
A M
P
[KAF]
[K
AF2]
[KAF3]
[KAF]
[K
AF2]
[KAF] [KA] [K]
Autofocus
(Lens only)
(With AF adapter 1.7×)
*1
z
–
z
–
z
–
–
#
*8
–
#
*8
Manual focus
(With the focus indicator)
*2
(With matte field)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Quick-Shift Focus System #
*5
××××
Five AF points/Eleven AF points zzz #
*8
×
Multi-segment metering zzzz ×
e (Program) mode zzzz #
*9
K (Sensitivity Priority) mode zzzz #
*9
b (Shutter Priority) mode zzzz #
*9
c (Aperture Priority) mode zzzz #
*9
a (Manual) mode zzzz #
P-TTL Auto Flash
*3
zzzz ×
Power Zoom – × –––
Automatically obtaining the lens focal
length information when using the Shake
Reduction function
zzz ××
Lens Correction function
*4
z ×
*7
×××
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 312 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
313
Appendix
11
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. The
[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using a DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.
*6 To use an FA/F SOFT 85 mm F2.8 lens or FA SOFT 28 mm F2.8 lens, set [22. Using
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. Pictures can be taken
with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.
*7 Only available with compatible lenses (FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited, or
FA 77mm F1.8 Limited).
*8 The focusing area is fixed to O (Spot).
*9 c (Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the aperture
ring has no effect on the actual aperture value.)
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom
use the K
AF2 mount. DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler
use the K
AF3 mount.
FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses
without an ultrasonic motor and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF
mount.
Refer to respective lens manuals for details. Note that this camera is not
equipped with a power zoom function.
When the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens
without an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or
auto bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [22. Using
Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu.
Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for restrictions that
apply.
All camera capture modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or
lenses with an aperture s position set to the s position.
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses
not set to the s (Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.
Lens names and mount names
Lenses and accessories that cannot be
used with this camera
Lens and Built-in Flash
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 313 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
314
Appendix
11
When [22. Using Aperture Ring] is set to
[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4]
menu, the shutter can be released even if the
aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or A lens is
not set to the s (Auto) position or a lens
without an s position is attached. However,
some features will be restricted as shown
below.
Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than
s
Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]
Lens Used
Exposure
Mode
Restriction
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens
only or with auto
diaphragm accessories
such as auto extension
tube K)
c (Aperture
Priority) mode
The aperture remains open regardless
of the aperture ring position. The
shutter speed changes in relation to
the open aperture but an exposure
error may occur. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with
diaphragm accessories
such as extension tube K)
c (Aperture
Priority) mode
Pictures can be taken with a specified
aperture value but an exposure error
may occur. In the viewfinder, [F--]
appears for the aperture indicator.
Manual diaphragm lens such
as reflex lens (lens only)
c (Aperture
Priority) mode
FA, F SOFT 85mm, FA
SOFT 28mm (lens only)
c (Aperture
Priority) mode
Pictures can be taken with a specified
aperture value in the manual aperture
range. In the viewfinder, [F--] appears
for the aperture indicator.
When the depth of field is checked
(Optical Preview), exposure metering
starts and the exposure can be
checked.
All lenses
a (Manual)
mode
Pictures can be taken with a set
aperture value and shutter speed. In
the viewfinder, [F--] appears for the
aperture indicator. When the depth of
field is checked (Optical Preview),
exposure metering starts and the
exposure can be checked.
If the aperture is set to a position other than s, the camera operates in c
(Aperture Priority) mode regardless of the mode dial setting except when set to
a (Manual) or C (Movie) mode.
22.
1
2
MENU
OK
OK
Using Aperture Ring
Prohibited
Permitted
Shutter will release when
Cancel
aperture ring is not set to the
"A" position
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 314 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
315
Appendix
11
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor
If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in the
image in certain situations such as when shooting against a white
background. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.
Shaking the CMOS sensor removes dust that has collected.
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.
2
Press the 4 button.
The Dust Removal function is activated
by shaking the CMOS sensor.
To activate the Dust Removal function
every time the camera is turned on, select
[Start-up Action] and use the four-way
controller (45) to select O.
When Dust Removal is completed, the
camera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Removal)
Dust Removal
MENU
Dust Removal
Start-up Action
Start
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 315 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
316
Appendix
11
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor and
visually displays the location of the dust.
You can save an image indicating the dust location and display it when
performing sensor cleaning (p.318).
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:
- A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA or F lens that has an s (Auto)
position is attached.
- The aperture is set to the s position when using a lens with an
aperture ring.
- The mode dial is set to any mode other than C (Movie).
- The focus mode lever is set to =.
1
Select [Dust Alert] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Alert)
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is
complete, dust will not be detected properly.
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be
detected properly.
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30
minutes from the time the image is saved. If more than 30 minutes elapse,
save a new Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.
• The Dust Alert image is saved only when an SD Memory Card is inserted.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 316 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
317
Appendix
11
2
Fully display a white wall or other
bright subject with no detail in
the viewfinder and press the
shutter release button fully.
After image processing is performed, the
Dust Alert image appears.
If the message [The operation could not
be completed correctly] is displayed,
press the 4 button and take another picture.
3
Check the sensor for dust.
Available operations
4
Press the 4 button.
The Dust Alert image is saved and the camera returns to the [R Set-up
4] menu.
E-dial/
M button
Displays the Dust Alert image at full screen display.
• Regardless of the camera settings, the Dust Alert image will be taken with
specific shooting conditions.
•Press the M button or turn the e-dial when the Dust Alert image is
displayed to view the sensor area at full screen display.
Dust Alert
Checks for dust on the sensor.
Press shutter release button
to reveal dust location
Check
MENU
SHUTTER
Exit
Exit
x1
x 1
x1
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 317 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
318
Appendix
11
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor
with a blower.
Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning
because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve
a fee.
You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning kit O-ICK1 (p.324) when
cleaning the CMOS sensor.
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
2
Turn the camera on.
3
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.
Removing Dust with a Blower
• Do not use a spray type blower.
• Do not clean the sensor when the shutter speed is set to h.
• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep the
lens mount cap on the camera when a lens is not attached.
• When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power
remaining to clean sensor] is displayed on the monitor.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when
cleaning the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC109
(optional), please install the battery with ample power remaining. If the
battery capacity becomes low during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. In
this case, stop cleaning immediately.
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is
turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and the
mirror.
• The self-timer lamp blinks while cleaning the sensor.
• This camera features a CMOS sensor corresponding to the shake reduction
system, and it may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS
sensor. It is not a malfunction.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 318 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
319
Appendix
11
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Mirror Up] and press
the 4 button.
The mirror is locked in the up position.
If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on
the sensor within the last 30 minutes, the
Dust Alert image appears on the monitor.
Clean the sensor while checking the
location of the dust.
5
Clean the CMOS sensor.
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a
blower with a brush may scratch the
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS
sensor with a cloth.
6
Turn off the camera.
7
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original
position.
Sensor Cleaning
Cancel
Mirror Up
Raises mirror and opens shutter
for access to clean sensor.
Turn the power off to finish
OK
OK
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 319 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
320
Appendix
11
Optional Accessories
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Contact
a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with
the camera.
Battery Charger kit K-BC109 (*)
(Kit includes Battery Charger D-BC109 and AC plug cord.)
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109 (*)
AC Adapter kit K-AC109
(Kit includes AC Adapter D-AC50, DC Coupler D-DC109 and AC plug
cord.)
Lets you power your camera from an AC outlet.
AA battery holder D-BH109
Adapter for using four commercially
available AA batteries.
Power Supply Accessories
The AC adapter and battery charger are only sold as a kit respectively.
D-BH109
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 320 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
321
Appendix
11
Auto Flash AF540FGZ
Auto Flash AF360FGZ
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are
P-TTL auto flash units with a maximum
guide number of 54 and 36 (ISO 100/m),
respectively. Their features include
slave-sync flash, contrast-control-sync
flash, high-speed sync flash, wireless
flash, slow-speed sync and trailing
curtain sync flash.
Auto Flash AF200FG
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit
with a maximum guide number of 20
(ISO 100/m). It features contrast-
control-sync flash and slow-speed sync
flash when combined with an
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.
Auto Macro Flash AF160FC
The AF160FC is a flash system
especially designed for macro
photography to take close, shadowless
pictures of small objects. It is compatible
with existing TTL auto flash functions
and it can be used with a wide range of
PENTAX cameras by using provided
adapter rings.
Flash Accessories
AF540FGZ
AF360FGZ
AF200FG
AF160FC
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 321 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
322
Appendix
11
Hot Shoe Adapter F
G
Extension Cord F5P
Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F
Use the adapters and cords to use the
external flash away from the camera.
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
When using the AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, this
large clip is used for setting the external
flash on a desk or table.
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
This viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying up to approximately 1.18
times.
When the eyecup is attached to the
W with a viewfinder magnification of
approximately 0.85 times, the combined
magnification becomes approximately
1.0 times, making manual focusing
much easier.
Magnifier F
B
This viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying the central area of the
viewfinder 2×.
You can see the entire view by simply
flipping up the accessory from the eye-
piece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.
For Viewfinder
Hot Shoe Adapter FG
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
Magnifier FB
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 322 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
323
Appendix
11
Ref-converter A
This is an accessory that changes the
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°
intervals. The viewfinder magnification
can be switched between 1× and 2×.
Diopter correction lens adapter M
This accessory adjusts the diopter.
Install it on the viewfinder.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder
image clearly, choose one of the eight
correction of approximately –5 to
+3 m
–1
(per meter).
Eyecup F
Q (*)
ME Viewfinder Cap
Lets you shoot pictures from within 4 m of the front of the camera.
Remote Control F
Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1
Remote Control
Ref-converter A
Diopter correction lens adapter M
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 323 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
324
Appendix
11
Camera Case O-CC84
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)
Hand Strap O-ST991
Hand Strap O-ST992
Free Length Strap O-ST842
Use this kit to clean the optical parts
such as the CMOS sensor and lens of
this camera.
Body Mount Cap K
Hot Shoe Cover F
K (*)
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)
AV Cable I-AVC7
Camera Case/Strap
Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1
Others
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 324 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
325
Appendix
11
Error Messages
Error Message Description
Memory card full
The SD Memory Card is full and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or delete unwanted images. (p.52, p.84)
Data may be saved when you perform the
following operations.
• Change the file format to JPEG. (p.195)
• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG
Quality setting. (p.192, p.193)
No image
There are no images that can be played back
on the SD Memory Card.
This image cannot be
displayed
You are trying to play back an image in a format
not supported by this camera. You may be able
to play it back on another brand of camera or
your computer.
No card in the camera
The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the
camera. (p.52)
Cannot use this card
The inserted SD Memory Card is not
compatible with this camera.
Memory card error
The SD Memory Card has a problem, and
image capture and playback are impossible. It
may be viewable on a computer but not with this
camera.
Card is not formatted
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is
unformatted or has been formatted on another
device and is not compatible with this camera.
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.
(p.268)
Card is locked
The write-protect switch on an SD Memory
Card you have inserted is locked. Unlock the
SD Memory Card. (p.53)
The card is
electronically locked
Data is protected by the SD Memory Card
security feature.
This image cannot be
enlarged
You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be
enlarged.
This image is protected
You are trying to delete an image that is
protected. Remove protection from the image.
(p.240)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 325 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
326
Appendix
11
Battery depleted
The battery is exhausted. Install a fully charged
battery or new AA batteries in the camera.
(p.43)
Not enough battery
power remaining
to clean sensor
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or new AA batteries, or use the AC
adaptor kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)
Not enough battery
power remaining to
activate Pixel Mapping
Appears during Pixel Mapping if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or new AA batteries, or use the AC
adaptor kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)
Image folder cannot be
created
The maximum folder number (999) and file
number (9999) are being used, and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or format the card. (p.268)
Unable to store image
The image could not be saved because of an
SD Memory Card error.
Settings not stored
The DPOF settings could not be saved because
SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted
images and perform DPOF setting again. (p.84)
The operation could not be
completed correctly
The camera was unable to measure the manual
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try
the operation again. (p.202, p.316)
No more images can be
selected
You cannot select 100 or more images at a time
for Index (p.229) and Select & Delete (p.236).
No image can be processed
There are no images that can be processed
using Digital Filter (p.253) or RAW
Development (p.259) function.
This image cannot be
processed
Appears when you try to perform Resize
(p.250), Cropping (p.251), Digital Filter (p.253),
or RAW Development (p.259) for images
captured with other cameras, or when you try to
perform Resize or Cropping for minimum file
size images.
The camera failed to create
an image
The creation of an index print image failed.
(p.229)
Error Message Description
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 326 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
327
Appendix
11
Camera overheated.
Disabling Live View temporarily
to protect circuitry
Live View cannot be used because the
camera’s internal temperature is too high.
Press the 4 button and try using Live View
again when the camera has cooled down.
Cannot start Live View
Appears when Live View is started when [22.
Using Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting
4] menu is set to [Prohibited] and the lens
aperture ring is set to a position other than s,
or a lens without an s position is being used.
This function is not available
in the current mode
You are trying to set a function that is not
available when the capture mode is set to
Picture mode, H (Scene) mode or C (Movie)
mode.
Error Message Description
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 327 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
328
Appendix
11
Troubleshooting
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it
back in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery
out and put it back in again. Then, the mirror will retract when the camera
is turned on again. After these procedures are done, if the camera
operates correctly, it does not require any repairs.
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service
center.
Problem Cause Remedy
The camera
does not
turn on
Battery is not
installed
Check if battery is installed. If not, install a
fully charged battery.
Battery is not
installed properly
Check the orientation of battery.
Re-insert battery according to the +/–
symbols. (p.45, p.46)
The battery power is
low
Replace with a charged battery or use the
AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)
The shutter
cannot be
released
The lens aperture
ring is set to other
than the s position
Set the lens aperture ring to the s position
(p.104) or select [Permitted] in [22. Using
Aperture Ring] of the [A Custom Setting 4]
menu. (p.314)
The built-in flash is
charging
Wait until charging is finished.
There is no available
space on the SD
Memory Card
Insert an SD Memory Card with available
space or delete unwanted images. (p.52,
p.84)
Recording Wait until recording is finished.
Autofocus
does not
work
The subject is
difficult to focus on
Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects
that have low contrast (the sky, white walls,
etc.), dark colors, intricate designs, rapidly-
moving objects or scenery shot through a
window or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on
another object located at the same distance
as your subject, then aim at the target and
press the shutter release button fully.
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.134)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 328 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
329
Appendix
11
Autofocus
does not
work
The subject is not in
the focusing area
Position the subject in the focus frame in the
middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is
outside the focusing area, aim the camera
at the subject and lock the focus, then
compose a picture and press the shutter
release button fully. (p.132)
The subject is too
close
Move away from the subject and take a
picture.
The focus mode is
set to \
Set the focus mode lever to =. (p.122)
The focus
cannot be
locked
[AF Mode] is set to
k
Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when [AF
Mode] is set to
k
(including when the
k
setting is automatically selected in
f
). The camera will continue focusing on
the subject while the shutter release button is
pressed halfway. If there is a subject that you
want to focus on, set [AF Mode] to
l
(Single mode) and use the focus lock. (p.125)
The Capture mode
is set to \ in Picture
mode, or n, l, R,
or Y in H mode.
Set Capture mode to any setting other than
\ (Moving Object) in Picture mode, or
n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap),
R (Kids), or Y (Pet) in H (Scene) mode.
(p.91)
The AE Lock
function
does not
operate
The shutter speed is
set to h
Set the shutter speed to any mode other
than h. (p.113)
The built-in
flash does
not
discharge
When the flash
mode is set to C or
C
, the flash will not
discharge if the
subject is bright
Set the flash mode to b (Manual Flash
Discharge) or D (Manual Flash+Red-eye
Reduct.). (p.75)
The mode dial is set
to a
Set mode dial to any setting other than
a (Flash Off). (p.91)
H mode is set to
A, K, n, Z, U,
or E
Set H (Scene) mode to any mode other
than A (Night Scene), K (Sunset),
n (Stage Lighting), Z (Night Scene
HDR), U (Candlelight), or E (Museum).
(p.93)
The power
zoom
system does
not work
The camera does
not have the power
zoom function
Use manual zoom. (p.74)
Problem Cause Remedy
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 329 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
330
Appendix
11
The USB
connection
with a
computer
does not
work
properly
The USB connection
mode is set to [PTP]
Set [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2]
menu to [MSC]. (p.293)
Shake
Reduction
does not
work
The Shake
Reduction function
is off
Set [Shake Reduction] to on. (p.142)
The Shake
Reduction function
is not set properly
If a lens for which the focal length
information cannot be obtained is used, set
the focal length in the [Input Focal Length]
screen. (p.143)
Shutter speed is too
low for the Shake
Reduction function
to be effective when
panning or shooting
night scenes, etc.
Set [Shake Reduction] to off and use a
tripod.
The subject is too
close
Move away from the subject, or turn off the
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.
Problem Cause Remedy
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 330 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
331
Appendix
11
Main Specifications
Model Description
Type
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with
built-in retractable P-TTL flash
Lens Mount
PENTAX K
AF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)
Compatible Lens K
AF3, KAF2 (power zoom not compatible), KAF, KA mount lenses
Image Capture Unit
Image Sensor Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.6 × 15.8 (mm)
Effective Pixels Approx. 12.4 megapixels
Total Pixels Approx. 12.9 megapixels
Dust Removal
SP coating and CMOS sensor operations with the Dust Alert
function
Sensitivity (Standard
Output)
AUTO/200 to 12800 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV, or
1/3 EV), expandable from ISO 100 to ISO 25600. Up to ISO
1600 in h mode.
Image Stabilizer
Type CMOS image sensor shift
Effective
Compensation
Range
Up to 4 EV (depending on the used lens type and shooting
conditions)
File Formats
File Format RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF2.0 compliant
Recorded Pixels
JPEG: E (4288 × 2848 pixels), J (3936 × 2624 pixels),
P (3072 × 2048 pixels), i (1728 × 1152 pixels)
RAW: E (4288 × 2848 pixels)
Quality Level
RAW (12bit): PEF, DNG JPEG: C (Best), D (Better),
E (Good), RAW + JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible
Color Space sRGB, AdobeRGB
Storage Medium SD/SDHC Memory Card
Storage Folder
Date (100_1018, 100_1019...)/
PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...)
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 331 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
332
Appendix
11
Viewfinder
Type Penta-mirror viewfinder
Coverage (FOV) Approx. 96%
Magnification Approx. 0.85× (50 mm F1.4 ·
∞)
Eye-Relief Length
Approx. 19.1 mm (from the view window), Approx. 21.6 mm
(from the center of lens)
Diopter Adjustment Approx. -2.5 to +1.5m
-1
Focusing
Screen
Natural-Bright-Matte II focusing screen
Live View
Type TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Focusing Mechanism
Contrast detection + Face detection, Contrast detection, Phase
matching
Display
Field of View approx. 100%, Magnified view (= mode: 2×, 4×,
6×/\ mode: 2×, 4×, 6×, 8×, 10×),
Grid display (4 × 4 Grid, Golden Section, Scale display), Bright/
dark area warning, Histogram
LCD Monitor
Type Wide viewing angle TFT color LCD
Size 3.0 inches
Dots Approx. 921,000 dots
Adjustment Brightness and colors adjustable
Preview
Type
Optical preview and digital preview (can be assigned to the |
button from the menu)
White Balance
Auto TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Preset
Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color,
N: Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten
Light, Flash, f, Manual
Manual Configuration using the display screen
Fine Adjustment Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis or G-M axis
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 332 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
333
Appendix
11
Autofocus System
Type TTL: phase-matching autofocus
Focus Sensor SAFOX IX, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)
Brightness Range EV-1 to 18 (ISO100)
AF Mode
Auto AF (f), Single AF (l), Continuous AF (k)
Focus priority or shutter priority mode for l
Focus priority or FPS priority mode for k
AF Point Selection Auto: 5 points, Auto: 11 points, Select, Center
AF Assist Light Dedicated LED AF assist light
Metering
Type
TTL open aperture, 16 segmented metering, center-weighted
and spot metering
Exposure
Compensation
EV1 to 21.5 (ISO200 · 50mm F1.4)
Exposure Mode
Auto Picture mode, Picture mode (Portrait, Landscape, Macro,
Moving Object, Night Scene Portrait, Flash Off)
Scene mode (Night Scene, Surf & Snow, Food, Sunset, Stage
Lighting, Night Snap, Night Scene HDR, Kids, Pet, Candlelight,
Museum)
* In Stage Lighting, Night Snap, and Night Scene HDR, the
file format is fixed to JPEG.
Program, Sensitivity Priority, Shutter Priority, Aperture Priority,
Manual, Bulb
EV Compensation ±3 EV (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps can be selected)
AE Lock
Can be assigned to =/L button from the menu. (Timer
method: two times the meter operating time set in the custom
function setting), Continuous as long as the shutter release
button is pressed halfway.
Shutter
Type Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter
Shutter Speed
Auto: 1/6000 to 30 sec., Manual: 1/6000 to 30 sec. (1/3 EV
steps or 1/ 2EV steps), Bulb
Drive Modes
Mode Selection
Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12s, 2s), Remote
Control (immediately, 3 sec., continuous), Auto Bracketing (3
frames)
Continuous Shooting
Approx. 6 fps, JPEG (E · C · Continuous Hi): up to 25
frames, RAW: up to 12 frames
Approx. 2 fps, JPEG (E · C · Continuous Lo): until SD
Memory Card is full, RAW: up to 36 frames
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 333 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
334
Appendix
11
Built-in Flash
Type
Built-in P-TTL flash with serial control
GN: approx. 16 (ISO200/m), approx. 12 (ISO100/m)
Angle of view: equivalent to angle of view of 28mm lens (35mm
format equivalent)
Flash Mode
P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain
Sync
High-Speed Sync and Wireless Sync are also available with
PENTAX dedicated external flash.
Sync Speed 1/180 sec.
Flash Exposure
Compensation
-2.0 to +1.0EV
Capture Functions
Custom Image
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Noise Reduction Slow Shutter Speed NR, High-ISO NR
Dynamic Range
Setting
Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction
Lens Correction Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction
Cross Processing Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
Digital Filter
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft,
Starbust, Fish-eye, Custom Filter
HDR Capture
Auto, Standard, Strong 1, Strong 2, Strong 3, Automatic
composition correction function
Multi-exposure
Select the number of shots between 2 and 9. Auto EV
adjustment available.
Interval Shooting
Capture Interval setting (1 sec. to 24 hr.), Start Interval setting
(immediate, designated time), Captures up to 999 images
Movie
File Format Motion JPEG (AVI)
Recorded Pixels b (1280 × 720, 16:9, 25 fps), c (640 × 480, 4:3, 25 fps)
Quality Level C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)
Sound Built-in monaural microphone
Recording Time
Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal
temperature of the camera becomes high.
Custom Image
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Cross Processing Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
Digital Filter Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Color
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 334 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
335
Appendix
11
Playback Functions
Playback View
Single frame, image comparison, multi-image display (4, 9, 16,
36, 81 segmentation), display magnification (up to 16×,
scrolling and quick magnification available), rotating, histogram
(Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/dark area warning,
detailed information display, copyright information display
(photographer, copyright holder), folder display, calendar
display, slideshow
Delete
Delete single image, delete all, select & delete, delete folder,
delete instant review image
Digital Filter
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Sketch Filter, Water Color,
Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Base Parameter Adjustment,
Monochrome, Color, Extract Color, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye,
Slim, HDR, Custom Filter
RAW Development
File Format (JPEG), Custom Image, White Balance, Sensitivity,
High-ISO NR, Shadow Correction, Distortion Correction,
Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction, Color Space
Edit
Resize, Cropping (aspect ratio and slant adjustment available),
Index, Movie Edit (divide or delete selected frames), Capturing
a JPEG still picture from a movie
Customization
Custom Functions 22 items
Mode Memory 13 items
Custom Button
| button (Green button, Custom Image, Optical preview,
Digital preview, Digital Filter, Cross Processing, One Push File
Format)
=/L button (AF, AE-L)
Text Size Standard, Large
World Time World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)
Language
English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,
Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, and Japanese
AF Fine Adjustment ±10 steps, Uniform adjustment
Copyright Information
Names of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” are
embedded to the image file.
Revision history can be checked using the provided software.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 335 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
336
Appendix
11
Power Supply
Battery Type
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109
With AA battery holder D-BH109 (optional), four AA batteries
(lithium, Ni-MH rechargeable, alkaline) can be used.
AC Adapter AC Adapter Kit K-AC109 (optional)
Battery Life
(With D-LI109)
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
470 images,
(without flash usage): approx. 560 images
Playback time: approx. 300 minutes
(With AA lithium batteries)
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
1,000 images,
(without flash usage): approx. 1,600 images
Playback time: approx. 620 minutes
* Tested in compliance with CIPA standard. Actual results
may vary depending on the shooting conditions/
circumstances.
Interfaces
Connection Port USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible)/AV output terminal
USB Connection MSC/PTP
Video Output Format NTSC/PAL
Infrared Connection Infrared connection in/out (IrSimple)
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions
Approx. 125 mm (W) × 97 mm (H) × 68 mm (D) (excluding
protrusions)
Weight
Approx. 544 g (body only), Approx. 598 g (including dedicated
battery and SD Memory Card)
Accessories
Package Contents
USB Cable I-USB7, Strap O-ST53, Rechargeable Lithium-ion
Battery D-LI109, Battery Charger D-BC109, Software (CD-
ROM) S-SW110,
<Mounted on the camera> Eyecup F
Q, Hot shoe cover FK,
Body mount cover
Software PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 336 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
337
Appendix
11
Glossary
AdobeRGB
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial
printing. Wider range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of the
color range so colors available only when printed are not lost when editing
images on a computer. When an image is opened by non-compatible
software, the colors look lighter.
AE Metering
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera,
select from [Multi-segment Metering], [Center-weighted Metering] and
[Spot Metering].
AF point
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, select
from [Auto], [Select] and [Spot].
Aperture
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing
through the lens to the CMOS sensor.
Bright Portion
Overexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears white.
Camera Shake (Blur)
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, and
raising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize the
camera. As camera shake is most likely to occur when pressing the shutter
release button, use the Shake Reduction function, Self-timer or Remote
Control shooting to prevent camera movement.
CMOS sensor
Photography element which converts light entering through the lens into
electric signals that create an image.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 337 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
338
Appendix
11
Color Space
A defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,
[AdobeRGB], which supports a wider color gamut than sRGB, can be also
used.
Color Temperature
This numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, and
to a reddish color as the color temperature falls.
Dark Portion
Underexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears black.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture value, lens focal length, and
distance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture value
(higher number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture
value (smaller number) to decrease the depth of field.
DNG RAW file
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats are
converted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images
increases significantly.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily
be made by taking the images to a DPOF photo printing store.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 338 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
339
Appendix
11
Dynamic Range (D-Range)
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.
This is the same as the term “Exposure latitude” used with silver halide
film.
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, overexposed and/or
underexposed areas are less likely to occur within the image, and when
the dynamic range is narrow, all image tones can be reproduced sharply
and accurately.
EV (Exposure Value)
Exposure value is determined by a combination of the aperture value and
the shutter speed.
EV Compensation
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed
and/or aperture value.
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Exposure Bracketing
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button is
pressed, three images are captured. The first one has no compensation,
the second is underexposed and the third is over-exposed.
Histogram
A graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents
the number of pixels. This is useful when you check the exposure level of
an image.
ISO Sensitivity
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shot
with a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.
However, images taken with a high sensitivity are more susceptible to
noise.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 339 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
340
Appendix
11
JPEG
An image compression method. In this camera, select from C (Best),
D (Better), or E (Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited for
viewing on your computer or attaching to e-mail.
ND (Neutral Density) Filter
A filter available in different saturation levels that adjusts the brightness
without affecting the color tone of pictures.
Noise Reduction
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by
slow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.
NTSC/PAL
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and China.
Quality Level
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as the
compression rate rises.
RAW data
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data is data
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at the
time of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, and
Sharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data
is 12 bit data that contain 16 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data. Rich
gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer and use the
provided software to create image data with different settings, such as
JPEG.
Recorded Pixels
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.
Shutter Speed
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changed
by altering the shutter speed.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 340 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
341
Appendix
11
sRGB (standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for
computer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Vignetting
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from the
subject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially
blocked by the lens.
White Balance
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source so
that the subject appears to have the correct color.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 341 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
342
11
Appendix
Index
Symbols
[A Rec. Mode] Menu .... 87, 304
[Q Playback] Menu .... 221, 307
[R Set-up] Menu ......... 266, 308
[A Custom Setting] Menu
....................................... 89, 309
Q (Playback) button
................................... 21, 23, 82
| (Green) button ..... 21, 23, 197
mc (EV Compensation)
button ............................. 21, 117
K/i (Flash pop-up/Delete)
button ................... 21, 23, 78, 84
I Auto Picture ........... 69, 92
= Portrait ............................... 92
s Landscape ........................ 92
q Macro ................................. 92
\ Moving Object ................... 92
. Night Scene Portrait ......... 92
d Blue Sky .......................... 92
a Flash Off ............................ 92
A Night Scene ...................... 93
Q Surf & Snow ..................... 93
K Food .................................. 93
K Sunset ............................. 93
n Stage Lighting .................. 93
l Night Snap ........................ 93
Z Night Scene HDR ............ 93
R Kids .................................... 93
Y Pet .................................... 93
U Candlelight ........................ 93
E Museum ........................... 93
C Movie .............................. 167
A
AC adapter ............................. 50
Accessories ......................... 320
Action in a Mode .................112
Adding the date ....................286
AdobeRGB ...................205, 337
AE Lock ................112, 120, 133
AE Metering ..................114, 337
AF Fine Adjustment ..............128
AF assist light .................19, 127
= (Autofocus) ....................122
=/L button ............21, 123
AF coupler ..............................19
AF Mode ...............................125
AF point ........................129, 337
AF160FC ......................180, 321
AF200FG ......................180, 321
AF360FGZ ....................180, 321
AF540FGZ ....................180, 321
Alkaline batteries ....................46
Aperture ..........................96, 337
Aperture Priority Mode c ....108
Aperture ring .................104, 314
Aspect ratio ..........................251
Auto Flash Discharge .............77
Auto Image Rotation .............222
Auto Picture I ............69, 92
Auto Power Off .....................281
F (White Balance) .........200
Autofocus = .......................122
c (Aperture Priority) Mode
.............................................108
AV cable ...............................242
AV device .............................242
B
Base Parameter Adj (Digital
Filter) ....................................253
Battery ......................43, 46, 282
Battery Type .........................282
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 342 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
343
11
Appendix
Beep .................................... 269
Blue Sky d .......................... 92
Bright areas ........... 31, 207, 337
Bright/Dark Area warning ..... 222
Brightness adjustment ......... 207
Brightness Level .................. 277
Brightness of the monitor ..... 277
Built-in Flash .......................... 75
Bulb shooting ....................... 113
C
Calendar display .................. 226
Camera shake ............. 141, 337
Candlelight U ........................ 93
Capture Mode ........................ 91
Card access lamp .................. 19
Catch-in Focus ..................... 136
Center-weighted .................. 115
Charging ................................ 43
City names ........................... 272
Cloudy (White Balance) ....... 200
CMOS sensor ...................... 337
CMOS sensor cleaning ........ 315
Color (Digital Filter) ...... 156, 254
Color of the monitor ............. 278
Color Space ................. 205, 338
Color Temperature ....... 202, 338
Computer ............................. 291
Continuous Autofocus .......... 133
Continuous mode k ....... 125
Continuous Shooting ........... 149
Contrast (Custom Image) .... 213
Contrast AF .......................... 160
Contrast-Control-Sync mode
(flash) ................................... 189
Control panel ................... 26, 35
Copyright Holder .................. 283
Correct exposure ................... 96
Creating New Folders .......... 279
Cropping .............................. 251
Cross Processing ................. 216
f (White Balance) ...........200
Custom Filter (Digital Filters)
.....................................156, 254
Custom Image ......................213
[A Custom Setting] Menu
.......................................89, 309
D
Dark areas ..............31, 208, 338
Date Adjustment .....................64
Date change .........................270
Daylight (White Balance) ......200
Daylight-Sync Shooting ..........80
DCF ......................................338
Default settings .....................304
Delete .............................84, 236
Delete all images ..................239
Delete folder .........................238
Deleting a single image ..........84
Depth of field ..................97, 338
Destination ...........................270
Detailed information display ...28
Developing ...........................259
Digital Filter ..................155, 253
Digital Preview ..............137, 140
Diopter adjustment .................58
Direct keys ................34, 86, 304
Display Color ........................276
Display language ............60, 273
Distortion ..............................211
DNG .............................196, 338
DPOF ...........................285, 338
Drive Mode .............................86
Dueling Images ....................246
Dust Alert ..............................316
Dust Removal .......................315
Dynamic Range ......99, 207, 339
E
E-dial ................................21, 23
E-dial in Program ..................105
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 343 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
344
11
Appendix
Editing movies ..................... 171
Error message ..................... 325
EV ........................................ 339
EV Compensation ........ 117, 339
mc (EV Compensation)
button ............................. 21, 117
EV Steps .............................. 118
Exif ............................... 283, 339
Exposure ................................ 96
Exposure Bracketing .... 118, 339
Exposure mode .................... 103
Exposure warning
..................................... 108, 109
External flash ....................... 180
Extract Color (Digital Filter)
..................................... 155, 254
Eyecup ................................... 58
F
Face Detection AF ............... 160
File Format ........... 195, 196, 296
File number .......................... 280
Filter ............................. 155, 253
Filter Effect (Custom Image)
............................................. 213
Fish-eye (Digital Filter)
..................................... 155, 254
Flash .............................. 75, 173
Flash (White Balance) ......... 200
Flash Exposure Compensation
............................................... 81
Flash Off a ............................ 92
K/i (Flash pop-up/Delete)
button ................... 21, 23, 78, 84
Fluorescent Light (White
Balance) ............................... 200
Focal length ......................... 143
Focus indicator .............. 70, 134
Focus Lock .......................... 132
Focus Mode ......................... 122
Focus mode lever .......... 21, 122
Focus point ...................129, 337
Focusing ...............................122
Focusing area .......................129
Folder display .......................225
Folder Name .........................279
Food K ...................................93
Format ..................................268
Four-way controller
(2345) .........................21, 23
G
Game ....................................246
Green button ............21, 23, 197
Grid display ..........................161
Guide Display .................24, 274
Guide indicator .......................32
H
HDR (Digital Filter) ...............254
HDR Capture ........................209
Help ......................................300
High Contrast (Digital Filter)
.....................................155, 253
High Dynamic Range ...........209
High/Low Key Adjustment
(Custom Image) ....................213
High-ISO NR ........................100
Highlight Correction ..............207
High-Speed Flash Sync mode
(flash) ...................................182
Histogram .......................30, 339
Hometown ............................270
Hue (Custom Image) ............213
I
Image Comparison ...............228
Image plane indicator .............19
Image storage capacity ..........55
Image Tone ..........................213
Index .....................................229
M button ...............21, 23, 27
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 344 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
345
11
Appendix
Infrared port ........................... 19
Infrared transmission ........... 244
Initial settings ......................... 60
Initializing ............................. 268
Input Focal Length ............... 143
Installing software ................ 296
Instant Review ............... 71, 276
Interval Shooting .................. 151
IrSimple ................................ 244
ISO Sensitivity ............... 98, 339
J
JPEG ........................... 195, 340
JPEG Quality ................. 54, 193
JPEG Recorded Pixels
....................................... 54, 192
K
Kelvin ........................... 202, 338
Kids R .................................... 93
L
Landscape s ........................ 92
Language setting ........... 60, 273
Lateral chromatic aberration
............................................. 211
LCD Color Tuning ................ 278
Lens ............................... 56, 312
Lens Correction ................... 211
Lens information contacts ...... 19
Lens mount index .................. 19
Lens unlock button ..... 19, 21, 57
Lens with aperture ring
..................................... 104, 314
Lithium batteries .................... 46
Live View ............................. 159
Locking the exposure ... 120, 133
Locking the focus ................. 132
U button ....................... 21, 162
M
a (Manual) Mode .................110
Macintosh .............................292
Macro q .................................92
Main switch .................21, 23, 59
Manual Flash Discharge .........78
Manual focus \ .................134
Manual Mode a ...................110
Manual White Balance .........202
Mass Storage Class .............294
Matte Field ............................135
Memory ................................288
3 button .............21, 23, 37
Menu operation ......................37
Menu page display ...............275
Meter Operating Time ..........116
Metering method ..................114
\ (Manual focus) ...............134
Miniature (Digital Filter) ........253
Mirror Lock-up ......................145
Mirror Up ..............................318
Mode dial ..........................21, 91
Monitor ...................................24
Monochrome (Digital Filter)
.............................................253
Movie ....................................165
Moving Object \ ...................92
MSC .....................................294
Multi-exposure ......................153
Multi-image display ...............224
Multiple flash shooting ..........188
Multi-segment .......................114
Museum E ............................93
N
ND (Neutral Density) Filter ...340
Night Scene A .......................93
Night Scene HDRZ ..............93
Night Scene Portrait . ..........92
Night Snap l .........................93
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 345 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
346
11
Appendix
Ni-MH rechargeable batteries
............................................... 46
Noise Reduction .......... 100, 340
NTSC ........................... 243, 340
O
4 button ............... 21, 23, 130
One Push File Format .......... 198
Optical Preview ............ 137, 139
Optional accessories ........... 320
P
e (Program) Mode .............. 104
PAL .............................. 243, 340
Pastel (Digital Filter) ............ 253
PC/AV terminal .................... 242
PEF ...................................... 196
PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4 ................................. 296
Pet Y .................................... 93
Phase Difference AF ............ 160
Photographer information .... 283
Picture mode .......................... 92
Picture Transfer Protocol ..... 294
Pixel Mapping ...................... 287
Pixels ................................... 192
Playback ................................ 82
Q (Playback) button
................................... 21, 23, 82
[Q Playback] Menu .... 221, 307
Playback mode palette
..................................... 220, 307
Playback time ........................ 49
Playing back images
continuously ......................... 232
Playing back movies ............ 169
Portrait = ............................... 92
Posterization (Digital Filter) .. 253
Power ..................................... 59
Press fully .............................. 72
Press halfway ........................ 72
Preview .................................137
Product registration ..............301
Program Mode e .................104
Protect ..................................240
Provided software .................296
PTP ......................................294
P-TTL (Flash) .......................186
P-TTL Auto (Flash) ...............181
Q
Quality Level
.......................54, 165, 193, 340
Quick Zoom ..........................222
R
RAW .............................195, 340
RAW Development ...............259
RAW File Format ..................196
[A Rec. Mode] Menu .....87, 304
Recorded Pixels
.......................54, 165, 192, 340
Red-eye reduction ..........79, 186
Remaining image storage
capacity ..................................49
Remote Control ....................147
Reset ....................................310
Resize ..................................250
Retro (Digital Filter) ......155, 253
Rotate ...................................235
S
Saturation (Custom Image)
.............................................213
H (Scene) mode .................93
SD Memory Card ....................52
Select & Delete .....................236
Self-timer ..............................145
Sensitivity ...............................98
Sensitivity Priority Mode K
.............................................106
Sensor Cleaning ...................318
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 346 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
347
11
Appendix
[R Set-up] Menu ......... 266, 308
Shade (White Balance) ........ 200
Shadow Correction .............. 208
Shake Reduction ......... 141, 166
Sharpness (Custom Image)
............................................. 213
Shooting Information .............. 25
Show Grid ............................ 161
Shutter Priority Mode b ...... 107
Shutter release button
................................... 21, 23, 72
Shutter speed ................ 96, 340
Single mode l ............... 125
Sketch Filter (Digital Filter)
............................................. 253
Slideshow ............................ 232
Slim (Digital Filter) ............... 254
Slow Shutter Speed NR ....... 102
Slow-speed Sync ................. 174
Soft (Digital Filter) ........ 155, 254
Sound .................................. 166
Spot Metering ...................... 115
sRGB ........................... 205, 341
Stage Lighting n .................. 93
Starburst (Digital Filter)
..................................... 155, 254
Status display ...................... 276
Status screen ......................... 25
Strap ...................................... 42
Sunset K ............................. 93
Superimpose AF Area ......... 129
Surf & Snow Q ..................... 93
K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode
............................................. 106
T
Taking pictures continuously
............................................. 149
Text Size .............................. 274
Toning (Custom Image) ....... 213
Toy Camera (Digital Filter)
.....................................155, 253
Trailing Curtain Sync ....176, 187
Transmission method ...........245
Tungsten Light (White Balance)
.............................................200
TV .........................................242
b (Shutter Priority) Mode ....107
U
USB Connection ...................293
USB Connection mode .........293
V
Video Output Format ............243
Viewfinder .........................32, 58
Vignetting .............................341
W
Water Color (Digital Filter) ....253
White Balance ..............200, 341
Windows ...............................292
Wireless flash control ...........186
Wireless Mode (Flash) .........183
World Time ...........................270
Write-protect ...........................53
Z
Zoom display ........................223
Zoom lens ...............................74
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 347 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
348
11
Appendix
WARRANTY POLICY
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-
authorized PENTAX service facilities.
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 348 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
349
11
Appendix
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the
service station to proceed with the servicing.
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory
rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the
warranty policy.
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 349 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
350
11
Appendix
For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,
which may require special handling.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 350 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Declaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We: PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
Located at: 600 12 Street, Suite 300
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera
Model Number: W
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: October, 2010, Colorado
th
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 351 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and
electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these
products.
Following the implementation by member states, private
households within the EU states may return their used
electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated
collection facilities free of charge*.
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your
old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.
*Please contact your local authority for further details.
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that
the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and
recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the
environment and human health which could otherwise arise
due to inappropriate waste handling.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you
wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t
purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed
on the home page of www.swico.ch
or www.sens.ch.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemicals involved.
OPKR00101/ENG
K-r_OPM_ENG.book Page 352 Thursday, September 30, 2010 2:57 PM
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Pentax-K-r

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Pentax K-r bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Pentax K-r in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 16,69 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Pentax K-r

Pentax K-r Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 370 pagina's

Pentax K-r Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 382 pagina's

Pentax K-r Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 1 pagina's

Pentax K-r Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 1 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info